EXAM PAPERS PLUS BLOG   >  Grammar Schools

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Photo of desks in a classroom

Mock exams are a good opportunity to reduce any anxiety your child might have about sitting the SATs tests in Year 6 of primary school. Often, these mock exams can be organised by SATs tutors and can offer a range of benefits to your child in the lead-up to the exam itself. In this article, we look at why sitting a SATs mock exam might be a good idea for your child.

 

Help to Understand Exam Structure

 

Mock exams can be set out in the same way as the real SATs exams, including sample questions that are similar to those that could be asked in the real test. While children might be confident in their knowledge of particular subjects, putting that into
practice in the exam room is definitely worth practicing.
Mock tests are very useful for showing your child what to expect from the SATs exam format and will put them at an advantage come SATs testing day.

 

Experience Test Conditions

 

Photo of desks in an exam room

 

The Key Stage 2 SATs may be one of the first times that your child experiences formal class test conditions. For Year 6 children, this can be a little unnerving and can sometimes result in unnecessary worry ahead of the exam.
Sitting a SATs mock exam can help your child become more familiar with this formal environment, without the pressure of it being the actual exam. Mock exams can provide children with reassurance and help to calm their nerves.

 

Improve Time Management


Similar to practice exam papers, mock exams are a great way of improving your child’s time management. Although the SATs are relatively short time-wise, children must be able to read texts and answer questions quickly and confidently before moving on to the next one immediately after.

 

By sitting a SATs mock exam, children can learn to manage their time more effectively, giving them a better chance of answering all the questions in the test, rather than potentially missing out on marks for unanswered questions.

 

Highlight Any Weaknesses

 

It’s unrealistic to expect children to be strong across all SATs subjects. The majority will most likely be stronger in some than others. Mock exams will identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses both in their subject knowledge and/or their exam technique.

 

Having your child take mock exams will help you gauge their progress and identify any areas that need to be improved. This will enable your child’s revision to be more focused and targeted in the final run-up to their SATs.

 

Boost Confidence

 

Photo of someone writing in a notepad

 

When your child has committed to their SATs revision and has shown progress through practice exam papers, mock exams can be an excellent way of boosting their confidence ahead of the real SATs exam.

 

If your child performs well and gains a good result in the mock test, they will recognise that their hard work is paying off and as a result, their confidence will be higher come exam day.

 

Practical Ways to Prepare for a Mock SATs Exam

 

Your child’s preparation for their mock exam should be no different to their preparation for Year 6 SATs. By the time they take the mock test, they should have been following a study plan and using SATs practice resources regularly. We would recommend the following practical tips for preparing for both mock SATs exams and the real SATs exam:

 

  • Your child should get plenty of rest the night before the test.
  • Ensure your child has a healthy, energy-packed breakfast on the morning of the exam.
  • Pack any SAT materials required for the exam the night before, to avoid stress in the morning.

 

Related posts:

SATs Prep Materials: What You Need

SATs Exam Preparation Tips and Strategies

 

Image sources:

https://www.pexels.com/photo/chairs-classroom-college-desks-289740/

https://www.pexels.com/photo/adult-blur-business-close-up-239548/

https://www.flickr.com/photos/patrick_q/2447140827/

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the St Bernard's Catholic Grammar School website

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School is the only co-educational Catholic grammar school in England. Located in Langley, Berkshire, St Bernard’s was founded in 1897 and continues to promote a spiritual life through worship and prayer.

 

Over 800 pupils are divided across four houses at St Bernard’s. The houses – Annay, Clairvaux, Cîteaux and La Plaine – are named after monastic houses that all relate to the school’s history. The school is deemed ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted and achieves excellent academic results.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School

 

Address: St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School, 1 Langley Road, Slough SL3 7AF

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: 01753 527 020

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 841 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: May and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are currently 120 Year 7 places available at St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School and admission is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Admissions to St Bernard’s are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s eleven plus exam date.

 

In cases of oversubscription, the school will adhere to the following criteria, in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after children who are Catholic
  2. Practising Catholic children
  3. Catholic children
  4. All other looked after children
  5. Practising Orthodox children
  6. Orthodox children
  7. Children of Staff
  8. Practising Other Christian children
  9. Other Christian children
  10. Practising members of other faiths
  11. Members of other faiths
  12. Any other children

 

Parents should note that the school’s Governing Body will give priority to baptised Roman Catholic children who have a written reference from their Roman Catholic priest.
For more details on St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School’s admission criteria, please consult its most recent admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School, in the first instance, parents need to register their child with the Slough Consortium. Parents then need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF), which can be done online via the Slough County Council website.

 

As St Bernard’s follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure their child is registered in time for the 11+ exam.

 

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. All schools within the Slough Consortium take the same papers, which cover a mix of questions that test Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning.

 

Parents will receive online results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF. All results are fully age standardised and this is the score parents will receive.

 

How to Prepare for the St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

It’s likely that your child will have very little experience of sitting a formal examination, so they may have some nerves in the build-up to the 11+. With this in mind, it’s important to put a good study plan in place well ahead of exam day to keep any anxiety to a minimum. Try not to leave your child’s 11 Plus preparation until the last minute; set aside time every day for your child to revise. Research has shown that just 20 minutes of focused revision every day can make a difference to a child’s understanding of subjects and key concepts.

 

We would also recommend introducing practice exam papers into your child’s study routine early on, as these will give your child a clearer idea of the style of the exam. Encourage your child to take these practice papers under timed conditions in order to get them used to answering questions quickly. Creating a ‘mock exam’ environment will be excellent practice for the actual exam at St Bernard’s.

 

Our 11+ practice papers can help your child to prepare for the St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School exam. The following papers should be integrated into your child’s 11 Plus revision:

 

11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)

11 Plus Cloze (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

The information provided about St Bernard’s Catholic Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Spalding High School website

Located in Lincolnshire, Spalding High School is a selective girls’ grammar founded in 1920. Almost 1,000 pupils attend the school, with boys aged 16-18 eligible for its Sixth Form.

 

Girls are divided across five houses from Year 7 upwards, with each house named after well-known women of historic importance: Curie, Johnson, Nightingale, Pankhurst and Sharman. Spalding High offers its pupils a well-rounded education and uses a variety of teaching methods in an effort to get the very best from its girls. The school also has a strong reputation for sporting achievements, and received sports college status in 2003.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Spalding High School

 

Address: Spalding High School, Stonegate, Spalding PE11 2PJ

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: jayne.knight@spaldinghigh.lincs.sch.uk, 01775 722110

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 989 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Spalding High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Spalding High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the eleven plus exam. There are currently 150 places allocated to Year 7 students.

 

Spalding High School is a member of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and so it is the Local Authority (LA) who co-ordinates the school’s admissions at Year 7.

 

With an average of four applications for every one place at Year 7 in recent years, should Spalding High be oversubscribed, it will apply the following criteria, in this order:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application or who will be attending the school at the time of admission
  3. Increasing order of driving distance

 

Get further information about Spalding High’s admissions criteria via the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Spalding High School

 

Application arrangements for places in Year 7 at Spalding High School are coordinated by Lincolnshire County Council’s admissions team. Parents who live in Lincolnshire should apply online, while parents resident in other areas must

apply through their home local authority (LA).

 

In order for children to sit the 11 Plus exam, parents must also complete a registration form. These are available from local primary schools in January of Year 5, or a form can be downloaded from the Spalding High School website directly.

 

Parents will receive test results from the LA in October, with official offer letters being distributed in the following March.

 

Spalding High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Prospective pupils to Spalding High School must sit two 11 Plus exams on two separate dates. These exams are multiple-choice and cover the following:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions. Questions are divided into 15 or more sections, with 5 or 6 questions in each section.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Questions must be answered one section at a time, with seven minutes allocated for each section. Pupils cannot move onto the next section until they are told to do so.

 

How to Prepare for the Spalding High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

To gain a Year 7 place at Spalding High School, your child must understand exactly what is expected of them in the Lincolnshire 11 Plus. Regular revision will soon highlight any knowledge gaps that your child might have, which will allow you to adapt their revision plan accordingly. As the tests focus on reasoning, you will find these two articles very useful when preparing your child’s revision plan:

 

Children who are confident about the tasks they will face in the exam room are more likely to perform well and achieve the required standard at 11+. Practice exam papers are a proven way of increasing your child’s confidence ahead of the exams, as they provide a greater understanding of the tests’ layout and question types.

 

The 11 Plus practice papers below cover all the required questions types that your child will face in the Spalding High School exam. Designed to challenge your child, they will highlight strengths and weaknesses. If your child is set to sit the Lincolnshire 11+ test, we would fully recommend the following practice papers:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Spalding High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Spalding Grammar School website

Spalding Grammar School (SGS) is a selective boys’ grammar, although girls are accepted into the school’s sixth form. Founded in 1588, the school is located in the Lincolnshire market town of Spalding.

 

The school was granted specialist status as a languages and engineering college in 2006, and was awarded an Ofsted ‘Outstanding’ rating in 2011. SGS became an academy in 2013. Thanks to various refurbishment projects, pupils enjoy new buildings that cater for drama, languages and business.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Spalding Grammar School

 

Address: Spalding Grammar School, Priory Road, Spalding PE11 2XH

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@spaldinggrammar.lincs.sch.uk, 01775 765800

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 944 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Spalding Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Spalding Grammar School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. SGS complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated arrangements for Year 7 admissions and is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools.

 

For further details about SGS’s admissions process and details of its oversubscription criteria, you are advised to call the school directly on 01775 765800.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Spalding Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Spalding Grammar School, parents should initially visit the Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest in a place. Parents should then download and complete the school’s registration form to book your child’s place for the eleven plus exam.

 

Parents will receive results via post in October, ahead of the deadline for the parental preference form to the LA. In March of the following year, the LA will send out offers for places based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

Spalding Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus test for Spalding Grammar School consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

 

How to Prepare for the Spalding Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

A popular grammar school in Lincolnshire, parents should expect their son to face strong competition for a Year 7 place at Spalding. To give children the best possible chance of achieving the required standard, parents should be willing to start their son’s revision well ahead of the exam date.

 

As SGS’s eleven plus focuses on reasoning,  we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

We understand that the thought of sitting the 11+ can cause some anxiety in children. If your son is showing any concern relating to the exam, consider using practice exam papers as a way of increasing his confidence. These papers will give him a better understanding of what is required in the test.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Spalding Grammar School exam. We would specifically recommend the following packs:

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Spalding Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the South Wilts Grammar School for Girls website

Founded in 1927, South Wilts Grammar School for Girls is located in Salisbury, Wiltshire. In 2003, the school gained specialist status in mathematics and computing and in 2010, it gained status as an international school. It achieved academy status in 2011.

 

Open to girls aged 11-18, South Wilts Grammar is a selective school and is consistently identified as one of the top-performing grammars for exam results in England.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for South Wilts Grammar School

 

Address: South Wilts Grammar School, Stratford Road, Salisbury SP1 3JJ

County: Wilshire

Admissions Info: admissions@swgs.wilts.sch.uk, 01722 323326

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 996 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: June / July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

South Wilts Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to South Wilts Grammar School for Girls in Year 7 is by academic selection, according to performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school is regularly oversubscribed and parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s open events before making an application to ensure that the school is a good fit for the pupil.

 

In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Girls who are eligible for the Pupil Premium and/or the Service Premium
  3. Girls who live in the school’s catchment area
  4. Girls who live outside of the catchment area and have a sister attending the school who is living at the same residence on the date of admission of the child
  5. Other girls in order of proximity to school

 

For further details about the school’s oversubscription criteria and/or the admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to South Wilts Grammar School

 

To apply for a place at South Wilts Grammar, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) and return it to the local authority, Wiltshire County Council. Parents are also obliged to complete a Supplementary Form and return it directly to the school. This form is only available when the Year 7 registration period is open.

 

Late applicants who pass the entrance test will be placed on the school’s waiting list in their relevant position, based on the oversubscription criteria, irrespective of the time of application.

South Wilts Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The South Wilts Grammar School for Girls eleven plus test consists of three papers:

 

  • Maths – this test lasts 50 minutes and covers the areas of number, algebra, measures, shape and space and handling data
  • English – a 45-minute test that may contain questions on reading comprehension, spelling, punctuation and grammar
  • Verbal Reasoning – this test lasts 50 minutes and includes questions testing vocabulary, codes, word patterns and more.

 

All three tests are multiple choice.

 

How to Prepare for the South Wilts Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

As a top-performing UK grammar school, competition for Year 7 places at South Wilts Grammar School for Girls is strong. At this stage, the school is looking for academic talent and the three-part 11 Plus test is set specifically to challenge candidates. However, with a good eleven plus study plan, your daughter should be able to rise to the challenge and approach the exam calmly and confidently.

 

Parents can help their daughters prepare for the  South Wilts Grammar 11+ by firstly reading our article on verbal reasoning skills as well as our 11 Plus guide to maths. Secondly, whatever your daughter’s current attainment level, she can improve her performance by using practice exam papers as part of her revision.

 

We have a number of practice papers to help boost your daughter’s confidence and expand her knowledge ahead of the South Wilts 11 Plus.  We would particularly recommend the following:

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Spelling (GL)

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

The information provided about South Wilts Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Skipton Girls' High School website

An all-girls selective grammar, Skipton Girls’ High School was founded in 1886 and is located in North Yorkshire. In 2003, it became the first all-girls school to be awarded specialist status as an engineering college and, in 2011, it became an academy. Since then, it has established itself as a founding member of the Northern Star Academies Trust.

 

Almost 800 girls are split across four houses, each of which is named after an influential woman – Brontë, Curie, Franklin and Johnson. The houses compete throughout the school year for the annual cup.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Skipton Girls’ High School

 

Address: Skipton Girls’ High School, Gargrave Road, Skipton BD23 1QL

County: North Yorkshire

Admissions Info: hawkinsg@sghs.org.uk, 01756 707600

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 794 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 116

Open Day Date: June/July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Skipton Girls’ High School is responsible for its own selection tests, but is required to comply with the North Yorkshire Coordinated Scheme for secondary school admissions to Year 7. With 116 places available at this stage, the school is openly committed to prioritising places for girls within the Craven area of North Yorkshire. To be considered for a place at the school at Year 7, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus test coordinated by GL Assessment.

 

In the event of oversubscription in Year 7, the school will adhere to the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, girls who have reached the required standard.
  2. Girls who are registered as Pupil Premium and eligible for Free School Meals at the time of application.
  3. Girls living within the School’s Priority Area who have reached the required standard.
  4. Girls living outside the School’s Priority Area who have reached the required standard.

 

If you have more questions about the school’s admission process at Year 7, take a look at its complete admission policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Skipton Girls’ High School

 

Parents must complete a registration form for their daughter to take the school selection tests. This form can be downloaded directly from the school’s website and information about how to complete the form can be found in the school’s admissions handbook, which can be found online.

 

Late registration forms will only be received in exceptional circumstances, but parents should note that 11 Plus testing will not be possible for late entrants until after the date when Year 7 places are allocated.

 

Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Eligible candidates will be required to sit three separate tests at 11+, in the following subjects:

 

  • Mathematics – this 50-minute paper consists of 50 multiple choice questions
  • English – this paper lasts 45-50 minutes and is made-up of 50 multiple choice questions. The test consists of two extracts with questions, with additional questions on spelling, punctuation, grammar
  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute paper consists of 85 multiple choice questions

 

How to Prepare for the Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Skipton Girls’ High School has built a strong reputation for offering its pupils a well-rounded education, and is known for producing confident young women who go on to excellent further education. With an average of five applications at Year 7 for every place, there is plenty of competition for its 116 places.

 

As a parent, you are responsible for encouraging your child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam. Practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing your child’s confidence for Skipton Girls’ 11 Plus, as she can become more familiar with the tests’ requirements and better understand the types of reasoning questions she might be asked.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests will help your child  successfully prepare for Skipton Girls’ High School 11 Plus exam; we would specifically recommend the following practice packs:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

The information provided about Skipton Girls’ High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Skegness Grammar School website

Skegness Grammar School was initially founded in 1483 as Magdalen College School, but took its current name in 1933. A co-educational day and boarding grammar school, it teaches over 700 pupils aged 11-18 and is in the seaside Lincolnshire town of Skegness.

 

Previously classed as a High Performing Specialist School, Skegness Grammar achieved academy status in 2012 and is currently sponsored by the David Ross Education Trust. The school delivers a traditional curriculum and places particular emphasis on self-discipline and good manners from its students. When not studying, pupils can take part in a variety of extracurricular activities and enrichment programmes

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Skegness Grammar School

 

Address: Skegness Grammar School, Vernon Road, Skegness PE25 2QS

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@skegnessgrammar.co.uk, 01754 610000

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 716 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 130 (approximately)

Open Day Date: June/July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Skegness Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Skegness Grammar School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangements for Year 7 admissions and is part of Lincolnshire Grammar Schools’ Consortium.

 

As the school does not publish its oversubscription criteria for Year 7, parents are advised to call 01754 610 000 with any questions.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Skegness Grammar School

 

Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) via the local authority (LA) website to register their child for an 11 Plus exam place.

 

Those living outside of Lincolnshire must return their CAF form to their own LA, who will forward the application to Lincolnshire LA.

Skegness Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Prospective pupils to Skegness Grammar School are required to sit two 11+ exams. Both papers are multiple choice and students will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this is a 50-minute test that is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning – this is a 40-minute test that consists of 70 questions and is split into five sections.

 

These papers are usually taken on separate days, but parents can make alternative arrangements that are more suitable to their child’s needs.

 

How to Prepare for the Skegness Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

For your child to achieve good results at 11+, they must be thoroughly prepared ahead of exam day. Allowing children plenty of time to study for the exams, without the need for any last minute exam preparation, will not only improve their confidence, but will also allow you to recognise any knowledge gaps that might exist.

 

Help your child to prepare for the 11 Plus exam by creating a study plan that’s achievable. Always opt for short bursts of regular study practice (say 20-30 minutes at a time), as opposed to irregular, lengthy sessions.

 

Our 11 Plus guide for parents will answer any further questions you have about the test. As the Skegness Grammar School eleven plus exam focuses on reasoning skills, your child will also benefit from the advice given in these articles:

 

 

Our practice exam papers at 11+ will help your child prepare for the Skegness Grammar School tests. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ GL Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ GL Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ GL Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ GL Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Skegness Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir Thomas Rich's School website

Established in 1666, Sir Thomas Rich’s School is a boys’ grammar located in Oakleaze, Gloucestershire. Girls aged 16-18 have been accepted into the school’s Sixth Form since 1987. The school’s pupils are divided across four houses: Eastgate, Northgate, Southgate and Westgate.

 

In 2010, the school became an academy and in recent years it has significantly grown and has undergone modernisation. Although a modern centre for learning, Sir Thomas Rich’s prides itself on its rich heritage and remains proud of its traditions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sir Thomas Rich’s School

 

Address: Sir Thomas Rich’s School, Oakleaze, Gloucester GL2 0LF

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: srb@strs.org.uk, 01452 338400

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 814 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for one of the 120 Year 7 places at Sir Thomas Rich’s School, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. The school’s admissions are centrally-coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council and parents who want to register their child to sit the 11+ test for the school must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form. This can be found on the school’s homepage when registration is open.

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s has no catchment area, nor is priority given to siblings during the place allocation process. However, looked after (or previously looked after) children and those in receipt of pupil premium who achieve the required standard in the test may be given priority. Parents are advised to call the school directly on 01452 338400 to confirm exact details.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sir Thomas Rich’s School

 

For your child to be considered for a Year 7 place at Sir Thomas Rich’s School, you must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via your Local Authority (LA) and a test registration form, available via the school’s website during the registration period. Once you receive the result of the test in October, you must state your ranked preferences on the CAF. The LA will send out official place allocations in March of the following year.

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Sir Thomas Rich’s School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

 

Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes. Answers are completed on separate sheets and pupils can work out any answers on the question booklet.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir Thomas Rich’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we understand that the thought of the 11 Plus can cause anxiety for both children and parents. However, with our considerable experience in producing expert respurces, we’re here to allay any concerns. In the first instance, work with your child to prepare a thorough revision timetable. If your child is distracted or bored by any extra revision sessions, include revision games where appropriate to encourage motivation.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision practice for the Sir Thomas Rich’s 11 Plus. These papers are an excellent way of improving your child’s time management skills, especially if taken under timed conditions. The more papers that are taken this way, the more your child will become familiar with the test layout and how quickly they will be required to answer questions in the exam.

 

For the Sir Thomas Rich’s 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Sir Thomas Rich’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir Roger Manwood's School website

Located in the historic Kent town of Sandwich, Sir Roger Manwood’s School is a co-educational grammar and is one of England’s 35 state boarding schools. Founded in 1563, the school achieved academy status in 2011. Pupils in Years 7 to 10 are divided into four houses: Dorman, Knolles, Trappes and Tudor.

 

The school encourages its students to be inquisitive and independent. It offers a range of extracurricular activities that students can participate in outside of the classroom, including sports, drama and music.

 

For an insight into academic life at Sir Roger Manwood’s School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sir Roger Manwood’s School

 

Address: Sir Roger Manwood’s School, Manwood Road, Sandwich CT13 9JX

County: Kent

Admissions Info: info@manwoods.co.uk, 01304 610200

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 914 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: September and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)

 

Sir Roger Manwood’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Sir Roger Manwood’s School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. To be considered for one of the 150 places available, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard. The school encourages both parents and pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for the school. At these events, school staff will be on hand to answer any questions parents might have regarding the admissions process and parents will have the opportunity to tour the school.

 

In 2016, Sir Roger Manwood’s School made a few changes to its admissions process. Whether your child is set to be a day pupil or boarder, you are advised to read this document before registering your child for the eleven plus test, as it discusses the school’s oversubscription criteria and explains how boarding and day places are allocated.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sir Roger Manwood’s School

 

Parents who wish to register their child for the 11+ test must do so before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test, you must complete an online registration form via the local authority (LA), Kent County Council.

 

Once your child has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to their LA. This process can usually be done online. The LA will send assessment decisions to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March the following year.

 

If you have any further queries about Sir Roger Manwood’s School admissions process at Year 7, call the school on 01304 610200 or email info@manwoods.co.uk.

 

Sir Roger Manwood’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The majority of grammar schools in Kent use the Kent Test at 11 Plus and Sir Roger Manwood’s is among them. The Kent 11+ exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, each with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Children will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.

 

  1. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases and/or in appeals for a school place.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir Roger Manwood’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in England, so for your child to succeed in the Kent eleven plus exam, they must be committed to investing additional time into learning and revising in the build-up to the test.

 

One piece of advice that we consistently share with parents is to encourage children to revise ‘little and often’. Children who approach their revision sessions in this manner are more likely to perform better in exams, compared with those who opt for longer sessions.

 

The Kent Test covers many different subject areas. Your child must be able to show their ability across all topics, so if they do have a weaker subject, use practice exam papers to highlight this early on in their revision. Our exam papers are an excellent way of monitoring your child’s progress week-to-week.

 

Pupils sitting the Kent Test with the aim of attaining a Year 7 place at Sir Roger Manwood’s School, will benefit from these resources:
Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)

 

These practice tests are designed to replicate the format, content, structure, question types, style and timings of the actual Kent 11 plus exam.

 

For additional, subject-specific revision of multiple-choice questions, we would also recommend these practice exam papers:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

If your child’s 11+ exam is looming and you’re concerned about a lack of time, don’t worry, we have put together some practical last minute tips on how to prepare for the exam.

 

The information provided about Sir Roger Manwood’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sale Grammar School website

Located in Trafford, Greater Manchester, Sale Grammar School is a co-educational facility founded in 1991. A selective school, Sale Grammar achieved academy status in 2011 and has specialist status in Visual Arts, Science and Maths.

 

The school aims to teach its pupils a traditional and challenging curriculum, while encouraging them to be innovative and creative. Pupils are active within the local community through a range of initiatives including arts, sports and science.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sale Grammar School

 

Address: Sale Grammar School, Marsland Road, Sale M33 3NH

County: Greater Manchester

Admissions Info: office@salegrammar.co.uk, 0161 973 3217

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,269 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7:  180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Sale Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Sale Grammar School is part of Trafford Grammar Schools CEM Consortium and is responsible for its own Year 7 admissions. All four schools within the Consortium use the same 11+ test. Admission to Sale Grammar School is determined by pupil performance in this 11 Plus exam.

 

Sale Grammar offers 180 places at Year 7 and, due to its popularity, always encourages parents and children to attend its open day in June. This event will give you a better idea of whether a grammar school education is the right learning environment for your child.

 

Sale Grammar School is consistently oversubscribed for Year 7 places, and so it uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children.
  2. Applicants living in the priority admission area as defined by postcodes M33, WA14, WA15, plus Trafford Authority residents within the M23 postcode.
  3. Applicants from outside the priority admission area will be placed in rank order as determined by their scores in the selection tests.

 

For more information about Sale Grammar’s admissions policy, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sale Grammar School

 

To apply for a place at Sale Grammar, parents must register their child for the school’s entrance examination. A link to the registration form will be available on the school’s admissions page from early May until late June. Further information about registration can be obtained from all primary schools in the catchment area.

 

In addition to completing the registration form, parents also need to complete a Local Authority Common Preference Form. Sale Grammar School should be listed on the form in ranked order of preference. Late applications can be considered but only after all other applications that were submitted before the deadline.

 

Sale Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at Sale Grammar School consists of two test papers, covering:

Each paper lasts approximately one hour and contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions. There will be a short break between the two papers.

 

For your child to be in with a chance of gaining a place at the school, they will need a qualifying score of 334. The results of the entrance exam are posted in October.

 

How to Prepare for the Sale Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Our in-depth guide to studying for the 11 Plus exam covers everything you need to know about creating a revision plan. If your child is set to take the Sale Grammar School 11+ tests, you may also benefit from the following articles:

 

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we would recommend starting your child’s exam preparation early with practice exam papers. These papers will give you a general overview of your child’s current abilities and will identify their strengths and weaknesses.

 

As the exam date gets closer, try to encourage your child to do the tests under timed conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

Our practice papers come complete with answers, enabling you to accurately measure your child’s performance and track their improvements. We have a host of 11 Plus practice papers that are specifically designed to help prepare your child for entry to Sale Grammar School.

 

We recommend using the following resources to prepare for the CEM 11+ exam used by Sale Grammar School:

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling

 

The information provided about Sale Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir Joseph Williamson's Mathematical School website

Located in Rochester, Kent, Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School (‘The Math’) is a boys-only grammar school that educates around 1,250 boys aged 11-18, with girls admitted into the Sixth Form. The school became an academy in 2011 and was one of the first 100 schools in the UK to be designated a National Teaching School.

 

The Math sets its pupils a challenging academic curriculum, while encouraging them to participate in a wide array of extracurricular activities and sports clubs. While the school is in many ways traditional, it does not shy away from a progressive approach to both teaching and learning. This ethos is reflected in the modern facilities that the school offers its pupils day-to-day.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School

 

Address: Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School, Maidstone Road, Rochester ME1 3EL

County: Kent (Medway)

Admissions Info: office@sjwms.co.uk, 01634 844008

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,250 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)

 

Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are 180 Year 7 places available at Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School and these are allocated based on student performance in the 11+ entrance exam. Ahead of submitting an application, the school encourages parents to attend one of its open events.

 

Schools within the Medway local authority (LA) use different allocation criteria for Year 7 places, so parents are advised to confirm The Math’s exact admission criteria with the school before completing the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

In the event of oversubscription, the LA will allocate places, giving priority to:

  1. Looked after children and previously looked after children.
  2. Children with a Statement of Special Educational Needs/Education, Health
    and Care Plan that names the school.
  3. Children who at the time of application have a sibling at the school.
  4. Children with health issues, supported by medical evidence, which requires the child to attend this school.
  5. Children who at the time of application have a parent who is a member of staff
    at the school.
  6. Children who live nearest to the school.

 

Sir Joseph Williamson’s uses the Medway Test for admission to the school. Children who attend a primary school in the area will take the exam at their current school. Those who live outside the area will take the exam in an independent test centre.

More information on the Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School exam can be accessed on the Medway local authority website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), which is administered by the Medway local authority.

 

All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about registration. Alternatively, parents can call the Admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 with any pressing questions about the application process.

 

Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and last 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

In The Medway Test, the 11 Plus maths and English sections are double-weighted in comparison to the verbal reasoning section. This means the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the verbal reasoning score in the Medway 11+.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The build-up to the Medway test can be an anxious time for parents and children, but with some forward-planning, it shouldn’t disrupt normal family life.

 

Give your son plenty of time for revision before the exam date. Try to adopt a steady approach to studying over several months to give your son the best chance of succeeding in the test. The more calm and confident he is going into the exam room, the more chance he’ll have of gaining a Year 7 place at Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School.

 

Encourage your son to include 11 Plus practice papers in his revision routine and set these papers under timed conditions to give him practice of answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ English Spelling

 

The information provided about Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School website

Founded in 1881, Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School is a selective school based in Canterbury, Kent that teaches girls aged 11-18. Boys have been admitted into the school’s Sixth Form since 2010.

 

Over 1,000 students are taught at Simon Langton Girls’, with the school placing emphasis on developing positive relationships between pupils and teachers and forging mutual respect. Recognising the importance of good health among students, the school has built a health and wellbeing programme that supports its pupils with mental health issues and encourages physical activities.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School

 

Address: Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School, Old Dover Road, Canterbury CT1 3EW

County: Kent

Admissions Info: post@langton.kent.sch.uk, 01227 463711

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,086 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 165

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar, prospective pupils must sit the Kent Test at 11 Plus and achieve the required standard. Parents and children are invited to attend one of the school’s open events, which are usually held in October. At the event, parents can ask any questions they have about the admissions process and will also be able to take a tour of the school.

 

Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar has recently changed its admissions process for Year 7, so parents are advised to read its current admissions policy closely before registering their daughter for a Year 7 place.

 

In case of oversubscription, Dartford Grammar School gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application
  3. Medical, health, social and special access reasons
  4. Children in receipt of Pupil Premium
  5. Proximity of a child’s home to the school

 

Visit the school’s website for more information about its admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete Kent County Council’s online registration form.

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive 11+ results from the Council by mid-October, with offers sent out in March.

 

If you have any further queries about Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School admissions process at Year 7, email the school at post@langton.kent.sch.uk or call 01227 463711.

 

Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The majority of Kent’s 35 selective grammar schools and 4 partially selective schools use the Kent Test at 11 Plus for Year 7 places. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with a separate answer sheet, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Girls will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  3. A 40-minute writing task. This will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be used in borderline cases.

 

How to Prepare for the Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in England, so for your daughter to secure one of the 165 Year 7 places at Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar, it’s vital that she prepares well.

 

Primary school children are shown to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer time period. As such, revision sessions should be short but frequent, while ensuring that your daughter continues to participate in her normal extracurricular activities and social events.

 

We recommend using practice exam papers as a way of highlighting any weaker areas that your daughter may have. Don’t be afraid to introduce these papers at the beginning of her revision, as they will allow you to monitor her progress as the exam approaches.

 

Pupils sitting the Kent Test, will benefit from practising with these resources, which are specifically designed to help students prepare for the Kent Test:

 

Additionally, if your child requires further practice in a particular subject area, the following practice papers will prove useful:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling (GL)

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Rugby High School website

Founded in 1903, Rugby High School is a selective girls’ grammar based in Bilton, Warwickshire. Boys are, however, accepted into the Sixth Form. Almost 800 students are split across four houses and participate in inter-house sports, music and charitable activities throughout the school year.

 

While offering a challenging academic curriculum, Rugby High School also places significant importance on preparing its girls for life after school, offering them a wide range of extracurricular activities and encouraging them to develop their social skills from Year 7.

 

For a look at pupils’ daily life at Rugby High School, watch this pupil-filmed video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Rugby High School

 

Address: Rugby High School, Longrood Road, Rugby CV22 7RE

County: Warwickshire

Admissions Info: rhsadmin@rugbyhighschool.co.uk, 01788 810518

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 800 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Warwickshire CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Rugby High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

The 120 Year 7 places at Rugby High School will be allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Parents are advised to attend the school’s open day in June before applying for a place. At the event, you will be able to ask questions about the admissions process and prospective pupils can learn more about the school and its learning environment.

 

In recent years, Rugby High School has been heavily oversubscribed for Year 7 places, so should there be more applications than available spots, the school will apply its oversubscription criteria until all places are filled.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Rugby High School

 

The admissions service at Warwickshire County Council coordinates Year 7 entry to Rugby High School. This service operates the same entrance test procedure as The Grammar Schools in Birmingham Consortium.

 

To apply for entry to the school, parents must register their daughter for the school’s entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF). The school’s admissions policy states that late 11 Plus registrations will not be considered in the first round of offers.

 

Parents will be notified by post of their child’s 11+ score by mid-October, with the first round of place allocations available from the beginning of March.

 

Rugby High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Rugby High School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last for 45 minutes each. They contain a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering the following subjects:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Mathematics

 

The Verbal Reasoning exam includes an English component, which involves a comprehension and cloze test. The maths exam involves a numeracy test, which tests for ability in mental arithmetic and problem-solving questions.

 

How to Prepare for the Rugby High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Your daughter should be prepared to work through a dedicated revision plan on top of her usual school work in the run-up to the 11 Plus exam. Just 20-30 minutes extra revision every day can help her prepare for the test.

 

The Rugby High School 11+ requires your daughter to have a good knowledge across a range of subjects, so it’s a good idea to work out where her knowledge gaps lie. Practice exam papers can accurately measure her performance and track her improvements in the lead-up to the tests.

 

If your daughter is preparing for the Rugby High School entrance exam, we have several 11 Plus practice papers that can help:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Rugby High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Ripon Grammar School website

One of the top 50 schools in the UK, Ripon Grammar is a selective, co-educational establishment based in the cathedral city of Ripon, North Yorkshire. Originally a boys’ school founded in 1555, girls were admitted in 1962. Today, over 900 students attend the school and, while the majority are day pupils, a number opt to board too.

 

In recent years, Ripon Grammar School has undergone a succession of improvements, including a new sports hall, sixth form block and laboratories. A catchment school, Ripon Grammar prides itself on serving an excellent education to the children of the local community.

 

For an insight into life at Ripon Grammar School, watch this short video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ripon Grammar School

 

Address: Ripon Grammar School, Clotherholme Road, Ripon HG4 2DG

County: North Yorkshire

Admissions Info: admin@ripongrammar.co.uk, 01765 602 647

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 920 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 117 (includes up to 14 boarding places)

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Ripon Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

While Ripon Grammar School is responsible for its own admissions policy in Year 7, it is the Local Authority (LA), North Yorkshire County Council, that manages the admissions and allocates places. Ripon Grammar has 117 places available in Year 7 and priority is given to both looked after and previously looked after children within the school’s catchment area. More details about North Yorkshire’s grammar school admissions policies can be found on the LA’s website.

 

The school offers places to the highest scoring 28 per cent of pupils who live within the catchment area. In the event of any surplus places, these are offered to pupils outside of the catchment. To be considered for a Year 7 place at Ripon Grammar, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus test, coordinated by GL Assessment.

 

For more information about the admissions process for Ripon Grammar School, visit the Council’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ripon Grammar School

 

Children living within Ripon Grammar School’s catchment area will be automatically entered into the LA’s selection scheme (unless parents choose to withdraw their child from the process). Parents should be aware that testing may not be possible for pupils who register after the closing date.

 

Parents will receive results in October and place allocations will be distributed in March the following year.

 

Ripon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus tests for Ripon Grammar School consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is divided into four sections, with 10 minutes allocated to each one. Once a section has been completed by pupils, they cannot go back to that section.

 

How to Prepare for the Ripon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Ripon Grammar consistently produces excellent exam results and the school is popular with parents in the local area, attracting at least five applications for every Year 7 place. With this level of competition to consider, parents should be prepared to start their child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam.

 

North Yorkshire’s LA 11 Plus tests focus on reasoning, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

Practice exam papers can give your child the edge over the competition and can boost their confidence. They also enable them to become more familiar with tests’ requirements and better understand the types of reasoning questions they may be asked.

 

We would strongly recommend that students do timed practice papers ahead of the exam to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions under time pressure.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests are designed to help your child prepare for Ripon Grammar School’s exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Ripon Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Ribston Hall High School website

Ribston Hall High School is a selective girls’ grammar situated in the city of Gloucester. Founded in 1921, it achieved academy status in 2011 and currently teaches approximately 850 girls aged 11-18.

 

Ribston Hall was given specialist school status in humanities and also became Gloucester’s only sports specialist school with languages. Thanks to funding in recent years, the school has been able to extend its sixth form facilities and in 2017 was deemed the most ‘oversubscribed grammar school in Gloucestershire’.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ribston Hall High School

 

Address: Ribston Hall High School, Ribston Hall High School, Stroud Road, Gloucester GL1 5LE

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: rhhs@ribstonhall.gloucs.sch.uk, 01452 382249

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 850 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: April and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (Gloucestershire)

 

Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

For your daughter to be in with a chance of gaining one of the 120 Year 7 places available at the school, she must reach the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. Like all the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire, Ribston Hall’s Year 7 allocations are dealt with via Gloucestershire County Council.

 

Ribston Hall is usually oversubscribed in Year 7. In such cases, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, in this priority order:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, girls
  2. Girls who ranked highest in the qualifying standard
  3. Girls who qualify for Pupil Premium who have met the qualifying standard
  4. The geographical proximity to the school measured in a straight line from the centre of the student’s main residence

 

To find out more about Ribston Hall High School’s admissions process in Year 7, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ribston Hall High School

 

Ribston Hall High School adheres to the same testing process for 11+ as the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire. The test is created by the Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). In order for your daughter to be considered for a place, you need to complete a Common Application Form online via the Local Authority website and a test registration form, which will be available on the school’s website during the registration period.

 

Late registrations will only be considered in exceptional circumstances.

 

The Local Authority will send test results to parents and guardians in October. If your daughter meets the qualifying standard, you can apply for a place at Ribston Hall. Parents will receive information about Year 7 place allocations in March of the following year.

 

Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Ribston Hall High School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by the University of Durham. The test consists of two papers covering:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Numerical Reasoning (Maths)

Both tests are made-up of multiple-choice questions, are taken on the same day and last 45-50 minutes each.

 

Our guide to 11+ exam boards will give you more information about what to expect from the CEM test.

 

How to Prepare for the Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Ribston Hall High School is one of the most popular selective schools in Gloucestershire, so parents should expect competition for Year 7 places. With 120 places available, your daughter should prepare for the 11+ exam well ahead of exam day. The best way to help her with her exam preparation is to work together to devise a thorough revision timetable.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision practice for the Ribston Hall High School 11 Plus. The earlier you start with these practice papers, the sooner you will be aware of any weaker subject areas. The papers will not only familiarise your daughter with the layout of the exam but will help to improve her time management skills.

 

For the Ribston Hall High School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Ribston Hall High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Reading School for Boys website

Reading School for Boys is a boys-only grammar based in Reading, Berkshire. One of the oldest schools in England, it was initially founded in 1125 as the school of Reading Abbey and was re-founded in 1486. Reading School accepts both day pupils and boarders and currently educates 900 boys.

 

Reading School gained academy status in 2011 and since then has undergone significant refurbishment, resulting in a new science block, computing rooms and a lecture theatre. While the school instills its traditions in its pupils, it also looks to bring innovation and entrepreneurial spirit to their learning.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Reading School for Boys

 

 

Address: Reading Grammar School, Erleigh Road, Reading RG1 5LW

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: Secretary@reading-school.co.uk, 0118 9015600

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 890

Number of Places in Year 7: 150: 12 boarders (maximum) and 138 day pupils (minimum)

Open Day Date: April and May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Reading School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Reading School for Boys is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. If you are considering Reading School as an option for your son, you are advised to attend one of the school’s open days. At the event, you will be able to take a tour of the school, talk to staff and get a better understanding of the overall admissions process.

 

Reading School is one of a number of grammar schools across Berkshire that uses the same 11+ entrance exam administered by CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring), which is affiliated to the University of Durham.

 

Unfortunately, the school cannot guarantee a place for every pupil that meets the required standard. The school is heavily oversubscribed and uses the following criteria to determine place allocation, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Students who live within the designated area of the school and is eligible for the pupil premium or service premium
  3. Pupils whose home address is within the designated area of the school
  4. Students whose home address is not within the designated area of the school

 

For more information about Reading School for Boys’ admission criteria, please visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Reading School for Boys

 

To register interest for a Year 7 place at Reading School for Boys, parents must complete their Local Authority’s (LA) Common Application Form (CAF). To register for the 11+ admissions test itself, parents need to complete a separate application directly with the school. This registration can be done online when the application window is open. Applications received after the school’s deadline will not be accepted.

 

Parents will receive the results of their child’s 11+ exam in October, before the deadline for the submission of the CAF.

 

Reading School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The CEM 11 Plus test for Reading School for Boys comprises of two separate papers, each lasting 50 minutes. Each test will assess:

 

 

Boys are expected to show competence in skills appropriate to Key Stage 2 English and Mathematics and to be able to apply these creatively.

 

How to Prepare for the Reading School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

Reading School for Boys regularly appears towards the top of UK school league tables and receives an average of five applications for every Year 7 place. In short, your son will have to be thoroughly prepared ahead of the exam and have the confidence to believe that he can secure his place at the school.

 

Begin by setting your son a detailed study timetable, split into realistic revision sessions, each lasting 30 minutes. These manageable blocks of revision will go some way to ensuring that your son doesn’t become overworked or distracted.

 

Reading School for Boys’ 11 Plus exam focuses heavily on reasoning skills, which can be difficult for some children to learn. Reading the following articles ahead of his exam preparation may help:

 

 

The CEM 11+ requires children to answer questions quickly and confidently, so your child needs to have mastered their time management skills ahead of the exam.

 

Introducing our practice exam papers into your son’s routine can help give him a better idea of roughly how much time he has to answer each question. They can also help monitor his progress and identify weak spots.

 

Our 11 Plus practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Reading School for Boys exam. We would specifically recommend:

 

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Spelling

 

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

 

The information provided about Reading School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Rainham Mark Grammar School is a co-educational grammar school for children aged 11 – 18 and is based in Medway, Kent. Previously known as Gillingham Grammar School, it took on its current name in 1975. An academy school, Rainham Mark provides its 1,200 pupils with a friendly and caring environment.

 

Rainham Mark encourages its students to participate in a variety of extracurricular activities, including performing arts, sport and music. The school also organises regular field trips or cultural exchanges as part of its curriculum.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Rainham Mark Grammar School

 

Address: Rainham Mark Grammar School, Pump Lane, Rainham, Gillingham ME8 7AJ

County: Kent – Medway

Admissions Info: office@rmgs.org.uk, 01634 364151

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,238 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 205

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)

 

Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Rainham Mark School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 205 places allocated to Year 7 students. Parents are advised to attend the school’s open evening to get more information about the admission process.

 

The Medway Test is used by Medway grammar schools. Children who attend a primary school in the area will take the 11 Plus exam at their current school. Those who live outside the area will take the exam in an independent test centre.

 

In the event of oversubscription, the school applies the following criteria, giving priority to:

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children who receive free school meals
  3. Rank order of score as determined by Medway’s Selection Procedures

For more details about Rainham Mark Grammar School’s admissions process, please refer to the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Rainham Mark Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Rainham Mark Grammar School, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority.

 

All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about the registration process. Alternatively, the school recommends calling the Admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 if you have any outstanding questions.

 

Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

  • A verbal reasoning test
  • A maths test
  • An English (extended writing) test

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple-choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and last 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

In previous years, in The Medway Test, the 11 Plus maths and writing sections have been double-weighted in comparison to the Verbal Reasoning.

 

How to Prepare for the Rainham Mark Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

If Rainham Mark Grammar School is one of your chosen preferences for Year 7, your child must sit the Medway Test at 11 Plus. It’s important to plan ahead and use the most relevant practice resources available in order to keep stress levels to a minimum. We advise parents that 11 Plus preparation should start as early as possible, as leaving it until the last minute can cause unnecessary worry and won’t produce good results.

 

Encourage your child to do some 11 Plus practice papers under timed conditions for the Medway Test, to get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Rainham Mark Grammar School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Rainham Mark Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Mary's Grammar School website

Walsall-based Queen Mary’s Grammar School was founded in 1554 and is a selective boys’ grammar. One of the oldest schools in the UK, it gained academy status in June 2011 and is a specialist Language College.

 

Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, the school has received funds to build a new school wing and in recent years has completed projects including a new sports hall, swimming facilities and biology laboratories.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Mary’s Grammar School

 

Address: Queen Mary’s Grammar School, Sutton Road, Walsall WS1 2PG

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: postbox@qmgs.walsall.sch.uk, 01922 720696

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 722 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Dates: June and July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Queen Mary’s Grammar School is part of the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton, but the school itself administers the 11 Plus tests. Pupils must reach the required standard via an 11+ entrance exam to be considered for entry to Queen Mary’s, although achieving this standard does not automatically secure a place.

 

With 150 places available in Year 7, prospective pupils must achieve the qualifying score in the 11+ test to be considered. If the number of applications exceeds the number of places available, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score (limited to 30 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score until the admissions number is reached

 

Get further details about Queen Mary’s admissions process on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Mary’s Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Queen Mary’s Grammar School, parents must first complete the Once boys have sat the test, parents must complete a Local Authority (LA) Preference form, listing Queen Mary’s as a choice.

 

If you do not list a preference for Queen Mary’s, your son will not be offered a place, no matter how successful he is in the entrance test.

 

Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11+ exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 45 minutes. The papers assess:

 

 

Some of the questions are multiple choice and the papers will be divided into smaller, individually-timed sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Mary’s Grammar School11 Plus Exam?

 

As experienced teachers and tutors, we know that the build-up to the 11 Plus can be an anxious time for both children and parents. But equally, we know that devising a good study plan and using the best practice papers will increase your child’s confidence and is more likely to result in a good 11+ performance.

 

All children benefit from regular exam practice sessions, whatever their natural attainment, so for the Queen Mary’s Grammar School 11 Plus test, it’s advisable to introduce practice exam papers into your son’s study early on. These papers allow pupils to get a better idea of the types of questions they can expect in the exam and also provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities.

 

Practice exam papers are an excellent way of highlighting weaker skills or subjects, giving children more time to improve ahead of exam day.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we have a host of 11+ practice papers suitable for those sitting CEM-style 11 Plus exams, suchs as the ones used at Queen Mary’s Grammar School:

 

 

The information provided about Queen Mary’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth's High School 11 Plus exam

Originally founded in 1589 as a boys’ grammar, Queen Elizabeth’s High School (QEHS) completed a merge with the local girls’ school in 1983 to form its current set-up. Almost 1,200 pupils are taught at this co-educational grammar and are divided across six houses to compete in inter-school events including sport, art and music.

 

While providing pupils with a balanced academic curriculum, QEHS also places emphasis on ensuring its students are happy and confident. The school offers a counselling service, peer listening and gives pupils work experience opportunities throughout their time at QEHS.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s High School

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth’s High School Gainsborough, Morton Terrace, Gainsborough DN21 2ST

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: office@qehs.lincs.sch.uk, 01427 612354

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,171 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Queen Elizabeth’s High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

As a community grammar school, Queen Elizabeth’s High School is run by Lincolnshire Local Authority (LA). The school is part of Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and it is the LA, rather than the school, that controls Year 7 admissions.

 

Admission to QEHS in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 180 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open evening, which takes place in June.

 

In the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application
  3. Children of staff employed at the school
  4. The school is 9 miles or less from the child’s home address by driving distance
  5. The school is more than 9 miles from the child’s home address by driving distance

 

Please refer to the school’s admissions arrangement policy for more details, or visit the website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s High School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Queen Elizabeth’s High School, parents should visit the LA’s website to complete a Common Registration Form (CAF).

 

As the school will administer the 11+ test, parents must complete QEHS’s application form. If this is not returned by the deadline, your child will not be able to sit the exam. Parents will receive test results from the LA in October, with official offer letters being distributed the following March, based on the preferences submitted on the CAF.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Queen Elizabeth’s High School consists of two multiple-choice papers, taken over two exam dates:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions. The test involves a mix of questions which involve the use of letters and words, with some questions (approximately 20%) involving the use of numbers.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. This test uses questions involving shapes.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

With an average of four applications for every one place at Year 7, your child must be well prepared for the Lincolnshire 11 Plus. QEHS’s test focuses on reasoning, so read these useful articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 
Practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing your child’s confidence ahead of the tests, as they provide a greater understanding of the test’s layout and question types. To succeed at the 11+, children must have a solid grasp of time management. By using these practice papers under timed conditions, your child will have a good idea of how long to spend on each question type.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Queen Elizabeth High School exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Mary’s High School website

Founded in 1893, Queen Mary’s High School is a selective, girls’ only grammar based in Walsall, West Midlands. A recognised academy, the school educates approximately 700 pupils, who are divided into four houses: Austen, Brontë, Eliot and Shelley.

 

Queen Mary’s offers its pupils a traditional curriculum, while providing a range of extracurricular activities, exchanges, trips and other enrichment activities. Pupils can participate in in-house competitions, numerous clubs and can join the Student Council during their time at the school.

 

For an insight into life at Queen Mary’s High School, watch this short interview with the school’s headteacher:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Mary’s High School

 

Address: Queen Mary’s High School, Upper Forster Street, Walsall WS4 2AE

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: 01922 721013

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 700 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: April, June and October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)


Queen Mary’s High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Queen Mary’s High School operates its admissions arrangements and procedures in line with Walsall Council’s coordinated scheme for school admissions and is part of the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton.

 

The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the CEM 11 Plus exam. Pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ to be eligible for admission. However, attaining the qualifying score does not guarantee girls a place at the school.

 

If the number of applications exceeds the number of places available, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score (limited to 30 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score until the admissions number is reached

 

You can find further details about Queen Mary’s High School admissions process via the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Mary’s High School

 

 

Parents must make an application to their Local Authority (LA). If you live in Walsall, your LA is Walsall Council and you must complete its Common Application Form (CAF). On this form, you can choose at least three schools as preferences for Year 7.

 

If you do not list Queen Mary’s High School as a preference, your daughter will not be eligible for a place there. Parents are also required to register their daughter for the 11+ test via the school itself. This can be done online when registration is open.

 

Parents will be notified of official place offers in March.

 

 

Queen Mary’s High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Queen Mary’s High School 11+ exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 45 minutes. Both papers will cover all subjects: Numerical Reasoning, Comprehension, Literacy, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Verbal Reasoning.

 

Some of the questions are multiple choice and the papers will be divided into smaller, individually-timed sections.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Mary’s High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As a relatively small grammar school, Queen Mary’s is regularly oversubscribed in Year 7, with an average of five applications for every place. If Queen Mary’s is your daughter’s first choice of school, you must ensure that she has all the necessary resources to perform well in the 11 Plus exam.

 

To give your daughter the best chance of receiving an offer of a Year 7 place, ensure she has a detailed revision plan to follow. A timetable will ensure that your daughter covers everything she’ll need to know for the tests, without being overworked.

 

In order for your daughter to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Queen Mary’s High School, encourage her to use practice exam papers throughout her revision.

 

We would particularly recommend the following practice resources for the Queen Mary’s 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about Queen Mary’s High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth's School, Barnet website

Founded in 1573, Queen Elizabeth’s School is a boys’ grammar situated in Barnet, a market town in North London. Consistently one of the most academically successful grammar schools in England, it is an academy with a specialism in music.

 

Beyond the classroom, the school’s 1,000+ boys can participate in a range of sporting activities including cricket, rugby, athletics and water polo. The school prides itself on investing in these ‘enrichment’ activities, to ensure pupils are kept active and healthy.

 

For an insight into a life at Queen Elizabeth’s School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s School, Barnet

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth’s School, Queen’s Road, Barnet EN5 4DQ

County: Hertfordshire / London Borough of Barnet

Admissions Info: enquiries@qebarnet.co.uk, 0208 441 4646

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,182

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Queen Elizabeth’s School for Year 7 is by academic selection, following an entrance exam taken in September. With an average of 10 applications for every Year 7 place, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend the school’s open day in July, which will give you an opportunity to ask any outstanding questions about the school’s academic requirements.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s School has a strict oversubscription policy. In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the rank order for place allocations will be solely determined by the distance from the child’s home to the school. No other criteria shall be applied unless there is a tie following this determination.

 

A thorough explanation of Queen Elizabeth’s admissions process can be found on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s School

 

 

To apply for a place at Queen Elizabeth’s School, Barnet, parents must complete both the school’s online registration form and the local authority (LA) Common Application Form (CAF).

 

Parents should be aware of the school and LA’s application dates, as late applications are very unlikely to be considered.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11+ entrance exam at Queen Elizabeth’s School, Barnet consists of two multiple-choice test papers, covering English and Mathematics. Both papers are taken by candidates in the same session.

 

After the tests are completed, they will be marked and the scores will be fully age-standardised. The scores from the two tests will be combined to produce a single, overall entrance test score for each candidate. Candidates who achieve a combined score of 210 or higher will have met the standard required and will be considered for admission to the school.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Barnet’s Queen Elizabeth School is one of the UK’s top-performing grammars, so your son is likely to face strong competition for a Year 7 place. Don’t opt to leave your 11 Plus preparation until the last minute. Instead, set-up an achievable but challenging 11 Plus study plan well ahead of the 11+ exam to ensure your son understands the work that will be required to give it his best.

 

Starting revision early is key, so that your child has time to cover everything they need to know for the exam. The sooner their revision starts, the less likely they’ll be to become overwhelmed by the workload.

 

If your son is sitting his 11+ in the hope of gaining a place at Queen Elizabeth’s School, the following articles will be useful:

 

 

It is imperative that your son steps into the exam room feeling confident and prepared. Consider using practice exam papers to give him that boost.

 

For the Queen Elizabeth’s School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following practice papers:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith website

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School (QEGS) is a co-educational grammar located in Penrith, Cumbria. The school has academy status and teaches more than 800 pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1564, QEGS moved from its original location in 1917 and remains Cumbria’s only grammar school.

 

Pupils can choose to participate in a variety of lunchtime and after school activities including sport, drama and even a French film club.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth Grammar School, Ullswater Road, Penrith CA11 7EG

County: Cumbria

Admissions Info: reception@qegs.cumbria.sch.uk, 01768 864621

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 833 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date(s): July and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

With 120 places available in Year 7, admission to QEGS is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Before parents apply for a place at the school, it is advised that they attend either the school’s open day in July or one of its school tours in September. Parents will receive information about the admissions process at these events.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, or when two or more applicants achieve the same test score, priority will be determined as follows:

 

  1. Children who are, or have previously been in, looked-after care
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium or Service Premium
  3. Children resident within or attending state schools within the catchment area
  4. Scores in the verbal reasoning parts of the entrance test
  5. Scores in the non-verbal reasoning parts of the entrance test

 

For more information about the QEGS admissions policy, visit their website or call 01768 864621.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith

 

 

To register your child to sit the QEGS entrance test, parents and guardians must complete the school’s application form, which can be downloaded here. To make a valid application, parents must also complete the Local Authority’s SA3 form, which can be done online. If this second form isn’t completed in time for the test date, children will be unable to sit the entrance exam.

 

Any late applications will be considered after an initial round of waiting list places have been allocated.

 

 

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School’s 11+ test is split into three papers, covering:

 

 

All three GL Assessment papers are multiple-choice and are taken on the same day. Each paper includes questions typical to the KS2 National Curriculum.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

 

With QEGS being the only grammar school in the entire county of Cumbria, it’s inevitable that there will be some competition for Year 7 places. Improve your child’s chances of success in the QEGS 11 Plus exam by being organised from the start. Read our 11 Plus guide for parents to get a helpful overview of the exam.

 

If your child has already started their 11 Plus revision and you’ve noticed some regular mistakes or specific knowledge gaps, add practice test papers into their learning sessions. Not only will practice papers familiarise your child with the layout of the exam but will also help to improve their time management.

 

For the Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following practice papers:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth Grammar School Penrith was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle website

Located in the Lincolnshire market town of Horncastle, Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School is a co-educational grammar first established in 1327. The school specialises in Mathematics, Science and Modern Languages and gained academy status in 2012.

 

Almost 900 pupils aged 11-18 are taught a broad and balanced curriculum, while sporting achievements are placed at the centre of school life. Pupils have regular access to a range of sports facilities and can participate in many extracurricular clubs.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle

 

 


Address:
Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle, West Street, Horncastle LN9 5AD

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@qegs.lincs.sch.uk, 01507 522465

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 870 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools. With 120 places available in Year 7, in the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children who reach the required standard for entry.
  2. Children who have reached the qualifying standard for entry and who are eligible for pupil premium or the service premium.
  3. Eligible children whose permanent address is within the school’s designated area for free transport with priority being given to the order of their total scores in the entrance tests.
  4. Eligible children from all other areas with priority being given to the order of their total scores in the entrance tests.

 

For more information about Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle, parents should initially visit the Local Authority (LA) website to register their child’s interest. The school will use the LA’s timetable for applications and parents should be aware that if children meet the qualifying standard at 11+, this does not automatically guarantee a place in the school.

 

Parents will receive results via post in October and in March the following year, the LA will send out offers of places based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 35-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five equal sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar is a popular selective school in Lincolnshire, so to give your child the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place, you must invest time and resources into their 11 Plus revision. While it’s understandable that some children worry about sitting their 11+, if they have a good revision timetable in place from the beginning and get plenty of practice, there shouldn’t be anything to be worried about.

 

The 11 Plus at Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle focuses on reasoning skills, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

Practice exam papers are an effective way to increase your child’s confidence for the 11+, as they allow children to better understand the layout of the exam and the types of questions they will have to answer. Our 11+ practice papers for reasoning cover all the required question types that your child will face in the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Horncastle exam. Once the test is complete, you will receive immediate scored feedback, allowing you to track their progress easily.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar exam. We would specifically recommend the following practice resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School website

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford (QEGS) is a co-educational school with academy status situated in Lincolnshire. Founded in 1566, the school teaches approximately 550 pupils aged 11-18.

 

Prior to becoming a grammar school, Queen Elizabeth’s was a business and enterprise college and to this today it encourages its pupils to learn business skills by setting up their own private businesses while studying. The school also understands the importance of extracurricular activities and students regularly participate in clubs and school trips across the world.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford

 

 

Address: Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School Alford, Station Road, Alford LN13 9HY

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: reception@qegs.co.uk, 01507 462403

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 550 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 84

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. QEGS fully complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangements for Year 7 and is part of Lincolnshire Grammar Schools’ Consortium.

 

Compared to other grammar schools in Lincolnshire, QEGS Alford has a relatively small number of places available in Year 7, with just 84. Therefore, in the likely event that the school is oversubscribed, it will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after children who achieve the required score
  2. Children living within the school’s designated free transport area who achieve the required score
  3. Children who do not live within the school’s designated free transport area but attend the primary schools within it and who achieve the required score
  4. Pupils not living in the designated free transport area or attending a primary school in this area who achieve the required score

 

Further explanation of the school’s admissions process and its free transport area boundaries can be found via the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford

 

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s admission arrangements. Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) and apply directly via the local authority (LA) website to register their child for a 11 Plus exam place.

 

Those living outside of Lincolnshire must return their CAF form to their own LA, who will forward the application to Lincolnshire LA.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford must sit two 11 Plus exams. These exams are multiple-choice and will test students on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this is a 50-minute test that consists of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning – this is a 40-minute test that consists of 70 questions and is split into five sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Giving your child plenty of time to study for the exams will help improve their confidence and allow you to identify any knowledge gaps. If you find these gaps sooner rather than later, you’ll have more time to improve them ahead of the marked exam.

 

Help your child to prepare for the 11 Plus exam by creating a study plan that’s achievable. Allow them down-time for relaxation and opt for short bursts of study practice often, compared with more irregular, lengthy sessions.

 

Our 11 Plus Guide for Parents will answer any further questions you have about the test. As the school focuses on reasoning skills, your child should also benefit from the advice given in these articles:

 

 

Consider introducing practice exam papers into your child’s revision sessions. We offer several 11+ practice tests that can help your child to prepare for the QEGS 11 Plus exam. We would specifically recommend the following useful resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Poole Grammar School website

Located in Dorset, on the south coast of England, Poole Grammar School (PGS) is an all-boys’ grammar for pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1904, PGS is an academy and specialises in mathematics and computing.

 

Around 1,000 boys enjoy first-class facilities on campus. Sports are a major part of life at PGS and the school boasts a number of playing fields within its grounds. Poole Grammar School provides a well-rounded education that recognises the importance of academic achievement, while allowing pupils to explore various social and cultural activities.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Poole Grammar School

 

 

Address: Poole Grammar School, Gravel Hill, Poole BH17 9JU

County: Dorset

Admissions Info: pgsoffice@poolegrammar.com, 01202 692132

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 997 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Poole Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 places at Poole Grammar School are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Before applying for one of the 180 places available, parents and prospective pupils are encouraged to attend PGS’s open event in July. This will give you a chance to meet current pupils, teaching staff and learn more about the admissions process.

 

All four grammar schools in Dorset, including PGS, share the same admissions process. Year 7 admission is coordinated by Dorset’s Consortium. Should the school receive more applications than available places, as per previous years, the following oversubscription criteria are applied, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after boys
  2. Boys living within the Borough of Poole who receive Pupil Premium
  3. Boys living within the Borough of Poole and who do not receive Pupil Premium
  4. Boys whose parents are currently PGS staff members
  5. Boys who live outside the Borough of Poole who receive Pupil Premium
  6. Boys who live outside the Borough of Poole who do not receive Pupil Premium

 

For further details about Poole Grammar School’s admissions process, visit the school website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Poole Grammar School

 

 

To register your son for the Poole Grammar School 11 Plus exam, you must complete the Common Poole Grammar form, which will be available via the school’s website when the registration period opens.

 

Once your son sits the exam, you must apply to the Borough of Poole directly. Late applications will only be considered once the main application round has been completed.

 

 

Poole Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam at Poole Grammar School consists of three multiple-choice tests, administered by GL Assessment, split into the following subjects:

 

  • Mathematics – this 50-minute test covers aspects from the KS2 curriculum
  • English – this 45-minute tests covers comprehension, vocabulary and punctuation
  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is designed to analyse a pupil’s academic potential and is based on a fixed set of question types

 

How to Prepare for the Poole Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Parents should be prepared to start their child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam. Poole Grammar School’s 11+ exam tests a number of subjects, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

 

Practice exam papers are a proven, effective way of increasing your child’s confidence for Poole Grammar School’s 11+. They can help your son become more familiar with the structure, content and layout of the exams and better understand the types of questions they may be asked.

 

As the exam draws nearer, try to include timed practice papers in your child’s learning routine. Answering questions under timed conditions can help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering quickly.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests are specifically designed to help your child prepare for the Poole Grammar School exam. We recommend the following:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics Problem Solving

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11 + English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

The information provided about Poole Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Plymouth High School for Girls website

Founded in 1874, Plymouth High School for Girls (PHSG) is a Devon-based girls’ only grammar. The school’s specialist subjects are Mathematics, Science, Design Technology and Information Technology and it also has training school status.

 

The school’s 800+ pupils are divided across four houses: Anthony, Kendall, Latimer and Temple. These play a significant role in school life as students represent their houses to compete in numerous events. PHSG offers a supportive community, while encouraging students to be confident in their pursuit of knowledge.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bournemouth School

 

 

Address: Plymouth High School for Girls, St Lawrence Road, Plymouth PL4 6HT

County: Devon

Admissions Info: phs@phsg.org, 01752 208308

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 826 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Test One: GL Assessment | Test Two: Part GL Assessment and part set by school

 

 

Plymouth High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Plymouth High School for Girls is open to 120 pupils in Year 7. Admission to PHSG at this stage is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open event in September. This is a good opportunity to ask staff members and current pupils any questions you may have before applying to PHSG.

 

Once your daughter has taken the entrance exam, an application needs to be made through your local authority’s application system. In most cases, applications can be made online through your local authority’s website.

 

PHSG usually receives more applicants than there are available places in Year 7. If this is the case, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Candidates who qualify for Pupil Premium and who achieve the qualifying score (up to 12 places)
  3. Other candidates who achieve the qualifying score for the particular year of entry or a mark above it by rank order of standardised score

 

Get more information on PHSG’s website about the Year 7 admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Plymouth High School for Girls

 

 

Parents of students who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests at Plymouth High School for Girls must register with Plymouth County Council, before the exam date.

 

Prospective PHSG pupils will sit the entrance exams in September and offer letters will be issued in March the following year.

 

Plymouth High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Plymouth High School for Girls’ 11 Plus exam consists of three papers, taken over two testing days:

 

  1. English, set by GL Assessment, this test is multiple-choice and focuses on comprehension and English skills. This exam is taken on the first testing day.
  2. Mathematics, set by GL Assessment, this test is also multiple-choice. This exam is taken on the second testing day.
  3. Creative writing paper, set by the school. This exam is taken on the second testing day.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Plymouth High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While it’s understandable that some children can feel pressure in the lead-up to their 11+, we’re here to tell you that it needn’t be the case. You can keep your child’s stress levels to a minimum by being organised from the outset and providing your daughter with the right resources. Our 11 Plus guide for parents is a great place to start when collating exam information.

 

Practice exam papers should form an integral part of your daughter’s 11 Plus preparation. These will give her an understanding of the exam layout and structure, which will go a long way towards making her feel more comfortable under exam conditions.

 

For the Plymouth High School for Girls’ 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following GL-style practice resources:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

 

The information provided about Plymouth High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Pate’s Grammar School website

Cheltenham-based Pate’s Grammar School is a co-educational facility available to pupils aged 11-18. A Beacon School, Pate’s was founded in 1574 and became an academy in 2010. Recognised by Ofsted as ‘Beyond Outstanding’, Pate’s regularly appears towards the top of the UK’s best secondary school league tables.

 

Despite a challenging academic curriculum, Pate’s also recognises the importance of nurturing pupils’ more creative and sporting abilities. As such, the school offers a wide range of extracurricular activities, including music and drama.

 

There is plenty of musical talent at Pate’s; watch this short video from a recent concert featuring some of its music pupils:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Pate’s Grammar School

 

 

Address: Pate’s Grammar School, Princess Elizabeth Way, Cheltenham GL51 0HG

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: office@patesgs.org, 01242 523169

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 995 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: September / October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for one of the 150 Year 7 places at Pate’s Grammar School, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. Pate’s school admissions are centrally-coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council and parents who wish their child to sit the 11+ test for the school must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form via the school’s website, when registration is open

 

With an average of three applications for every place at Year 7 at Pate’s, in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to:

 

  • Looked after children or previously looked after children
  • Children entitled to Pupil Premium
  • Other ‘qualified’ children, in test rank order, until 150 places are filled

 

Pate’s website can offer you further information about the school’s admissions process if required.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Pate’s Grammar School

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School uses the same 11 Plus test from CEM (Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring) as the other six grammar schools in Gloucestershire. For your child to be considered for a Year 7 place at Pate’s, you must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via your Local Authority (LA) and a test registration form, available via the school’s website during the registration period.

 

For your child to be considered for a place at Pate’s, you must include the school as one of your ranked choices on the CAF if they have reached the Qualifying Standard in the 11+ exam, otherwise your child will not be considered for entry.

 

Parents will receive results from the 11 Plus as soon as possible after the exam and the LA will send out official place allocations in March of the following year.

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Pate’s Grammar School uses the CEM 11 Plus exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

 

Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To allay any concerns your child has about sitting the 11+ exam for Pate’s, work together on building a thorough revision timetable in the lead-up to the test. This timetable is the first step in giving your child the best possible chance of gaining a place at Pate’s. Additional revision sessions around the usual homework can lead to unrest and boredom in some children, so you may wish to introduce fun revision games to encourage motivation.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision tool for the Pate’s Grammar School 11 Plus. These papers are an excellent way of improving your child’s time management skills, especially if taken under timed conditions. The more papers that are taken in this manner, the more your child will become familiar with the test layout and how quickly they will be required to answer questions in the exam.

 

For the Pate’s 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following CEM resources:

 

 

The information provided about Pate’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Parkstone Grammar School website

Founded in 1905, Parkstone Grammar School (PGS) is a selective school for girls aged 11-18. Situated in the coastal town of Poole, Dorset, PGS gained academy status in 2011 and specialises in science and languages.

 

The school offers its 1,250 girls a broad and balanced education and aims to foster a love of learning while promoting independence for life after school. PGS actively promotes pupil health and wellbeing with a range of extracurricular sports and a healthy eating programme.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Parkstone Grammar School

 

 

Address: Parkstone Grammar School, Sopers Lane, Poole BH17 7EP

County: Dorset

Admissions Info: enquiries@parkstone.poole.sch.uk, 01202 605605

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,250 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All 180 Year 7 places at Parkstone Grammar School are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Should you have any questions about the admission process prior to applying for a place, the school welcomes parents and prospective students to its open evening, which takes place in July. Please contact the school directly on 01202 605605 to arrange.

 

Admission to PGS in Year 7 follows the procedure as agreed by the coordinated admission arrangements for Dorset’s Consortium. Therefore, should parents wish their children to be considered for admission to more than one selective school in the Consortium, they will take just one test.

 

Although the 11+ exam is the same across every school in the area, each has its own admissions oversubscription criteria. Parkstone Grammar gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after girls
  2. Girls who live within the Borough of Poole and who are currently entitled to the Pupil Premium
  3. Girls who live within the Borough of Poole
  4. Girls who live outside the Borough of Poole and who are currently entitled to the Pupil Premium
  5. Girls who live outside the Borough of Poole, in rank order of the entrance test scores, with those girls obtaining the highest scores given higher priority

 

For more information on Parkstone Grammar School’s admission criteria, please visit its website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Parkstone Grammar School

 

 

Parents who want to register their child with the school can do so by completing an online registration form via the Borough of Poole’s website.

 

Parents should note that late applications will not be dealt with until all other applications have been considered and the allocation of offers has been completed.

 

Exam results are sent out in October, at which point, you should complete your Local Authority form to apply for a place at Parkstone Grammar School.

 

 

Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam at Parkstone Grammar School consists of three multiple-choice tests, administered by GL Assessment, covering the following subjects:

 

 

Each test lasts for 50 minutes and is based on the KS2 curriculum.


How to Prepare for the Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Our guide to the 11+ is specifically for parents who have questions about the exam and is an excellent starting point ahead of your daughter’s revision.

 

There are numerous advantages to starting your daughter’s 11 Plus revision early; the more time she dedicates to studying for it, the more time she will have to improve any knowledge gaps ahead of the exam. By allocating time for short revision sessions, there is less chance of your daughter over-stretching herself, which can lead to burnout and a lack of motivation.

 

A keystone to your daughter’s 11 Plus learning will be introducing practice exam papers into her study routine. Your child is more likely to perform well in the Parkstone Grammar School 11+ if she is familiar with the test’s layout and has a good understanding of the types of questions she might be asked.

 

We have several useful and effective 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the content and style of the Parkstone Grammar School 11 Plus exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11 + English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics Problem Solving

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

The information provided about Parkstone Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Oakwood Park Grammar School website

Founded in 1918, Oakwood Park Grammar School (OPGS) is a boys’ grammar based in the Kent town of Maidstone. It has a co-educational sixth form. In 2003, the school became a mathematics and computing specialist college before gaining academy status in May 2011.

 

Pupils across five houses participate in a range of extracurricular activities, including sports at local, county and national levels. Pupils enjoy good music and drama facilities on campus and take part in an annual school-wide volunteering day to help the surrounding community.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Oakwood Park Grammar School

 

 

Address: Oakwood Park Grammar School, Oakwood Park, Maidstone ME16 8AH

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@opgs.org, 01622 726683

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,016 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

Oakwood Park Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Oakwood Park Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. With 160 Year 7 places available at OPGS, competition for entry is high. In the case of oversubscription, the school uses the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Children with a sibling that already attends the school
  3. Children with health issues and special access requirements
  4. Children who live closest to the school

 

Parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at OPGS have a right to appeal. You should lodge this appeal with the school directly, within 20 school days of the date of notification.

 

The school’s website offers further information about the admissions process.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Oakwood Park Grammar School

 

 

Oakwood’s Year 7 admissions are coordinated by Kent County Council, the Local Authority (LA). To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.

 

Once your son has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it online to Kent County Council. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the Council in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March the following year.

 

 

Oakwood Park Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Oakwood Park Grammar School follows the Kent 11 Plus exam format, which is split into the following sections:

 

  • Section 1:  A one-hour exam that aims to test students’ reasoning abilities. It is broken down into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  • Section 2: An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  • Section 3: A 40-minute writing task. While not marked as part of the overall 11 Plus score, it can be used as evidence for both borderline cases and in appeals for a grammar school place.

 

How to Prepare for the Oakwood Park Grammar School11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kent is known as the largest and most competitive grammar school area in the UK, so to keep your son ahead of his competition, he must start his revision for the 11 Plus early. Begin by creating an easy-to-follow revision timetable that covers all the required subjects, while also allowing time for relaxation to ensure your son doesn’t become overworked and anxious about the exam. Factoring in hobbies means your son is much more likely to remain motivated throughout his revision periods.

 

For the Kent 11+ Test, practice exam papers should be an essential part of your child’s revision routine as they can help you monitor their progress. They also give children a much-needed confidence boost as the exam date approaches.

 

We have specifically designed the following practice resources for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your son needs additional practice in a particular subject, or responds better to practice papers than regular revision sessions, we would also suggest the following:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

The information provided about Oakwood Park Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Founded in 1938, Nonsuch High School for Girls is an all-girls’ grammar school situated in Cheam, the London borough of Sutton. An academy school, Nonsuch has also gained specialist science and language school status.

 

Over 1,200 pupils are divided into seven houses and are randomly picked to be in each house. Nonsuch High School actively encourages its pupils to participate in fields where women are underrepresented, such as science, technology and engineering.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Nonsuch High School for Girls

 

 

Address: Nonsuch High School for Girls, Ewell Road, Cheam, Sutton SM3 8AB

County: London (Borough of Sutton)

Admissions Info: office@nonsuch.sutton.sch.uk, 020 8394 3400

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,242 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 210

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Part One: S.E.T/ Part Two: Set by school

 

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme. Entry to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET). With 210 places available in Year 7, the school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open events, which usually take place in July. At the open day, you can learn more about the admissions process and will have the opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.

 

In the likely event that the school should receive more applications than there are places, the school applies this oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after or previously looked after children
  2. Children eligible for Pupil Premium or Service Premium (up to 10 places)
  3. Children who obtain the highest score in the entrance exam, irrespective of home address (85 places)
  4. Children within the school’s catchment area who achieve the qualifying score (110 places)

 

Parents are advised to thoroughly read Nonsuch High School for Girls’ strict admissions policy before taking their daughter’s application further.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Nonsuch High School for Girls

 

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the SET (part one) must complete a Supplementary Form initially, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open. Only one form needs to be completed, even if you are applying to more than one school in the Sutton area.

 

If your daughter is successful in the SET, she will be invited to sit Nonsuch’s Second Stage Entrance Examination. Should your daughter pass this test, you must include Nonsuch High School for Girls on your Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) to be eligible for consideration for a place.

 

Parents will be informed of the outcome of the SET in late September.

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

In previous years, the test has been split into two stages:

 

  • Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice
  • Stage 2: Maths and English. Neither of these are multiple-choice and previous exams have included comprehension, a writing task and a standard maths test.

 

Each test paper includes questions typical to the KS2 national curriculum.

 

How to Prepare for the Nonsuch High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

None of the five fully-selective grammar schools in Sutton, including Nonsuch High School for Girls, reveal details about their exam provider. While this can offer an even playing field among applicants, it can cause unnecessary worry for both children and parents.

 

However, with Exam Papers Plus, you can be sure that your child has a great chance of success in securing a Year 7 place at Nonsuch High School. Start your child’s revision plan early and include online practice papers to help identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.

 

Nonsuch High School has reported that they receive over eight applications for each Year 7 place, so fierce competition is to be expected. To put your daughter ahead of that competition, we would recommend using the following practice papers, specifically designed for the S.E.T:

 

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 1

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 2 

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 3

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 4

 

If you would like further subject-specific practice, the following papers will prove useful:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

For the second stage, the following maths papers will prove useful:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

The information provided about Nonsuch High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Newstead Wood School website

Located in the London town of Orpington, Newstead Wood was founded in 1957 and gained academy status in 2011. A selective all-girls’ school, Newstead Wood teaches over 1,000 girls aged 11-18. The school specialises in engineering and languages and has been previously described by Ofsted as “an outstandingly successful school”.

 

Newstead Wood offers its pupils the opportunity to travel during their school life; watch this short video from the school’s 2017 trip to Borneo:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Newstead Wood

 

 

Address: Newstead Wood School, Avebury Road, Orpington BR6 9SA

County: London (Bromley)

Admissions Info: office@newsteadwood.bromley.sch.uk, 01689 853626

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,012 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Newstead Wood 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Newstead Wood School for Year 7 is by academic selection, via an 11 Plus exam. The school is regularly oversubscribed, with an average of eight applications for every one place at Year 7. Parents and students are encouraged to attend the school’s open day in September to ensure that the school is the correct environment for prospective pupils before applying for a place.

 

It is highly likely that there will be more applicants than available places in Year 7. The school ranks the top scorers in the 11+ selection tests and ranks them in order, giving priority to:

 

  1. Girls who live within a 9-mile radius of the school
  2. Daughters of a staff member that has been employed at the school for more than two years at the time of application
  3. Girls who do not meet the above conditions

 

Parents should be aware that, to date, no places have ever been offered to applicants from group #3, due to the high volume of applications that Newstead Wood receives.

 

For more information about Newstead Wood’s admissions process, visit the school’s website directly.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Newstead Wood

 

 

To apply for a place at Newstead Wood School, parents must first complete their Local Authority (LA) Application Form and state the school as one of their preferences.

 

Parents must return the Common Application Form (CAF) to their LA within the registration period. Secondly, parents must also complete Newstead Wood’s own Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which can be downloaded from the school’s website.

 

Parents will receive the results of the tests via post by mid-October.

 

 

Newstead Wood 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Girls will sit two tests in the following subjects:

 

 

Both these tests are multiple-choice and take between 40 – 50 minutes each.

 

The scores achieved by girls in the tests will be age adjusted and placed in ranked order based on the total score achieved.

 

How to Prepare for the Newstead Wood 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Newstead Wood School has an excellent reputation and consistently ranks highly in UK grammar school league tables. With this in mind, it’s inevitable that competition for Year 7 places will be high.

 

The school looks for pupils to have good reasoning skills and its two-part 11 Plus test will challenge many girls. Students should focus on both Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning skills in order to have a complete knowledge and understanding of the types of questions that may be asked.

 

If your daughter is due to sit the Newstead Wood School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Newstead Wood School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Mayfield Grammar School website

Mayfield Grammar School is a girls’ school located in the Kent town of Gravesend. The school teaches almost 1,000 pupils aged 11-18, with boys welcomed into the sixth form from age 16. Founded in 1914, Mayfield Grammar is an academy school with Specialist Science and Languages College status.

 

The school aims to provide a challenging academic schedule while simultaneously encouraging pupils to develop their personal talents through a range of extracurricular activities, such as art, drama and music.

 

For an insight into life at Mayfield Grammar School, watch this short promotional video from 2014 about its sixth form:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Mayfield Grammar School

 

 

Address: Mayfield Grammar School, Pelham Road, Gravesend DA11 0JE

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@mgsg.kent.sch.uk, 01474 352 896

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 996 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test / Mayfield Procedure (optional)

 

Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Mayfield Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. The school also admits girls through an optional test, the Mayfield Procedure, which is taken when girls have been unsuccessful in the Kent Test.

 

With 180 Year 7 places available at Mayfield, competition is high. In the case of oversubscription, the school gives priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Children with a sibling attending the school at the time of application
  3. Eligible children who reside in these postcode areas: DA3, DA4, DA9, DA10, DA11, DA12, DA13, ME3.
  4. Eligible children who reside in these postcode areas: DA1, DA2, ME2, TN13, TN14, TN15.
  5. Eligible children who do not reside in the areas as detailed in the third or fourth criteria

 

Parents are advised to check Mayfield Grammar School’s admissions process via the school’s website, as further information may become available.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Mayfield Grammar School

 

 

As Mayfield Grammar School uses the Kent 11+ Test as a means of selection at Year 7, parents must register online with the Kent Local Authority (LA). Parents also have the option of registering their daughter for the Mayfield Procedure, which provides another opportunity for gaining a place in Year 7.

 

If you would like your daughter to sit this test, parents must download a registration form from the school’s website once registration is open in June. The school admits girls through the Mayfield procedure when a child has been unsuccessful in the Kent testing process.

 

Parents will receive results through the post in mid-October and can access the Kent Test result via the LA’s website.

 

 

Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Most Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam, including Mayfield Grammar. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:

 

  1. This is an hour-long exam, divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
  2. This is a 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections:

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which will not form part of the final 11 Plus result but can be used in any borderline or appeal cases.

 

Prepare your daughter for the Kent Test with these sample questions and some further explanation about what to expect from the exam.

 

The Mayfield Procedure also consists of two parts:

 

  1. A computer-based test focusing on verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning and non-verbal reasoning.
  2. An English paper to assess reading and writing skills.

 

How to Prepare for the Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Your daughter can be confident and calm going into the Mayfield Grammar School 11 Plus exam if she is thoroughly prepared and has a good understanding of what to expect from the exam structure. Children at this age tend to learn more quickly if revision sessions are split into manageable chunks, as opposed to longer, more irregular sessions.

 

Ensure that your daughter has everything she needs to perform well in the Kent Test by using practice papers. If you add these into your daughter’s study plan early on, you will be able to identify any areas that need more work.

 

To help your daughter gain a Year 7 place at Mayfield Grammar School, we have created three practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

Once your daughter has completed these, you might notice she needs additional help in particular subjects, so why not try one of our practice exam papers below under timed conditions?

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Mayfield Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Marling School 11 Plus exam

Located in the Gloucestershire market town of Stroud, Marling School is a boys-only grammar for pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1887, Marling School became an academy in 2011. Over 800 boys are educated at the school and given the opportunity to participate in a range of extracurricular activities to support their personal development.

 

The school has a reputation for encouraging pupils with musical ability. To learn more about Marling’s music department, watch this video showcasing its 2017 music competition:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Marling School

 

 

Address: Marling School, Cainscross Road, Stroud GL5 4HE

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: admissions@marling.gloucs.sch.uk, 01453 762251

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 846 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: October/April/June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)
 

Marling School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Your son must reach the required standard in the 11 Plus exam to be in with a chance of gaining one of Marling School’s 150 Year 7 places. All of Marling’s admissions are coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council. Parents who wish their son to sit the 11+ test must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form, which can be found on the school’s website, when registration is open.

 

Marling has an average of three applications for every place at Year 7, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to looked after, or previously looked after children who achieve the required standard. Should there be any ties for places, the admissions authority allocates places at random.

 

To find out more about Marling School’s admissions process, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Marling School

 

 

Marling School is one of seven grammar schools in Gloucestershire that use the same 11 Plus test from the Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). For your son to be considered for a place at Marling School, you must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) online via the Local Authority and a test registration form, which is available online via the school website. Marling must be stated as one of your preferred school choices on the CAF in order to be considered.

 

Parents will receive results in October and if your son meets the qualifying standard at 11+, you can apply for a Year 7 place at Marling School.

 

Marling School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Since 2013, Marling School has used the CEM 11 Plus exam by the University of Durham. The test consists of two multiple-choice papers that cover the following subjects:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning (including English)
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Numerical Reasoning (Maths)

 

Both tests are taken on the same day and each last 45-50 minutes.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Marling School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If your son is worried about sitting his 11 Plus exam, the best way to help him is to prepare a thorough revision timetable. For your son to have the best chance of securing one of Marling School’s 150 Year 7 places, he must invest time into studying for the tests. Keep him motivated with fun revision games to suit his preferred style of learning and he’ll soon adapt to any additional revision that’s required.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective revision technique for the Marling School 11 Plus. The earlier you start with practice papers, the sooner you will be aware of any weaker subject areas. The papers will not only familiarise your son with the layout of the exam but will help to improve his time management skills.

 

For the Marling School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Marling School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Loreto Grammar School website

Founded in 1909, Loreto Grammar School is an all-girls Catholic grammar based in Altrincham, Trafford. It became an academy in 2012 and currently teaches over 1,000 girls. The school prides itself on its international links, with over 120 Loreto schools worldwide and sister schools in India, Australia and Spain.

 

Loreto Grammar School provides its pupils with an education to help shape their faith, while aiming to encourage them to seek leadership roles after their education is complete.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Loreto Grammar School

 

 

Address: Loreto Grammar School, Dunham Road, Altrincham WA14 4AH

County: Greater Manchester (Altrincham)

Admissions Info: admissions@loretogrammar.co.uk, 0161 928 3703

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,051 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Loreto Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

There are currently 150 places allocated to Year 7 pupils at Loreto Grammar School. Each of these places are awarded based on performance in the 11 Plus exam.

A school rooted in tradition, it encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open day in July, to learn more about the admissions process, take a tour of the school and ensure that it is the right environment for your daughter’s next stage of education.

 

Applications must be made online and late applications will not be considered. Loreto Grammar is a popular school and competition for entry is high. Should there be more applicants than available places in Year 7, Loreto uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Baptised, Roman Catholic, looked-after girls and previously looked-after girls
  2. Baptised, Roman Catholic girls who have sisters in the school at the time of admission
  3. Baptised, Roman Catholic girls who attend an associated Primary School and live in a nominated Local Pastoral Area
  4. Other Baptised Roman Catholic girls
  5. Other looked-after girls and previously looked-after girls
  6. Baptised girls of other denominations
  7. Other girls

 

For more information about Loreto Grammar School’s admission process, please consult the school website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Loreto Grammar School

 

 

Parents of students who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must do so with the school before the exam date. Once registration is open, the relevant form can be completed online via the school’s website. Parents must supply their daughter’s baptism certificate in order to complete the registration process. Late applications will not be considered.

 

Parents must include Loreto as a preferred choice on their Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) in order for their daughter to be eligible for a Year 7 place at the school.

 

 

Loreto Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to Loreto Grammar School must sit three tests at 11+:

 

  • Maths – this paper is written and set by the school and lasts approximately 45 minutes. Its structure can be considered similar to that of a SATs paper.
  • Verbal Reasoning – this paper is set by GL Assessment, is multiple-choice and lasts 50 minutes.
  • English – this paper is also set by GL Assessment, is multiple-choice and lasts 45 minutes.

 

Parents will be notified of the test results in October, which will indicate whether the student has attained the required score to be eligible for admission. However, place allocations will not be made public until March the following year and passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of entry to the school.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Loreto Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

When it comes to the 11 Plus exam, regular practice is key. To give your daughter the best chance of performing well and gaining a place at Loreto, they should incorporate practice papers into their study. Regular exposure to these types of papers could increase your daughter’s chance of achieving the required score in the 11 Plus.

 

It’s important to identify gaps in your daughter’s knowledge quickly; the sooner you recognise where additional work is needed, the less chance there is of her feeling overworked as the exam date approaches. Allocate any additional time to these gaps via a study plan and focus on the best revision techniques that work for your daughter’s learning style.

 

Encourage your daughter to sit practice papers under timed conditions, as this will vastly improve her time management skills and get her used to answering all required questions within the timeframe.

 

For the Loreto Grammar School 11+, we would specifically recommend the following resources for your daughter:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ English: Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving (GL)

11+ Mathematics: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Mathematics: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Mathematics: Pack 3 (GL)

 

 

The information provided about Loreto Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Maidstone Grammar School for Girls website

Founded in 1887, Maidstone Grammar School for Girls (known as MGGS), is a selective girls’ grammar, with boys allocated places in the school’s sixth form. The school originally opened with just 18 pupils and today educates 1,200 students.

 

Pupils are split into six houses: Britons, Danes, Normans, Romans, Saxons and Vikings, and compete in various annual competitions in an effort to win the house cup.

 

For an insight into academic life at Maidstone Grammar School for Girls, watch this short promotional video from 2011:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Maidstone Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Address: Maidstone Grammar School for Girls, Buckland Road, Maidstone ME16 0SF

County: Kent

Admissions Info: central@mggs.org, 01622 752 103

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,217 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: October/June/July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be eligible for a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School for Girls, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. The test exists to assess whether a grammar school education is the right option for your daughter.

 

With 180 Year 7 places available, competition for entry is high. In the case of over-subscription, the school uses the following criteria, giving priority to:

  1. Children in Local Authority Care
  2. Current Family Association (a sibling attending the school when the child starts)
  3. Health and Special Access Reasons
  4. Proximity of child’s home to school

 

For more information on Maidstone Grammar School’s admission criteria, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Maidstone Grammar School for Girls

 

 

To apply for Year 7 entry to MGGS, parents must register online with Kent Local Authority (LA).

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council – this can usually be done online. The Council will send assessment decisions to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March the following year.

 

If you have any further queries about Maidstone Grammar School for Girls’ admissions process, email the school central@mggs.org or call 01622 752 103.

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School for Girls requires pupils to take the Kent 11 Plus exam, which consists of two multiple-choice tests. The first test is one-hour long and is split into two sections, English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

The second test is a reasoning paper and is split into three sections:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Spatial Reasoning

 

This 60-minute test is broken up into smaller sections.

 

Prospective pupils will also be required to sit a 40-minute writing task. This is not marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but it may be used in grammar school appeal cases.

 

The Kent 11 Plus Exam: How to Prepare Your Child for Success

 

How to Prepare for the Maidstone Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While the Kent Test varies from year to year, all children will benefit from good preparation for their 11 Plus exam. Whatever your child’s current level, they will need to invest additional time for revision. For the Maidstone Grammar School for Girls’ 11+ test, we would recommend using practice exam papers as part of that revision. Practice papers give your daughter a clearer idea of the types of questions she can expect in the real exam and they will quickly highlight any subject areas that need additional focus.

 

Gaining a Year 7 place at a Kent-based grammar school can be difficult, but with the right preparation, your daughter needn’t be worried about her 11 Plus. We have designed three practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

You may wish to also integrate subject-specific practice using the resource packs below:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Maidstone Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Maidstone Grammar School website

Maidstone Grammar School was originally founded in 1549 to teach Latin grammar to the children of Maidstone. Now, it is a boys’ grammar school that teaches over 1,200 pupils, with girls admitted into the school’s sixth form.

 

The school has won both a Language College award and a Healthy School award and, in 2011, the school introduced an Applied Learning Centre, allowing pupils access to facilities such as editing suites.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Maidstone Grammar School

 

 

Address: Maidstone Grammar School, Barton Road, Maidstone ME15 7BT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: school@mgs-kent.org.uk, 01622 752101

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,276 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 205

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test.

 

With 205 Year 7 places available at Maidstone, competition for entry is high. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Qualifying pupils who are looked-after or previously looked-after children
  2. Children resident in one of the parishes listed here, achieving at least a mark halfway between the pass mark and the maximum marks available in the Kent Test
  3. Other qualifying children resident in one of the listed parishes
  4. Qualifying children who have siblings at the school, and those who live within the closest proximity to the school

 

Parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at Maidstone have a right to appeal, and in the first instance, must write to The Clerk to the Governors, care of the school.

 

For more information about Maidstone Grammar School’s admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Maidstone Grammar School

 

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.

 

Once your son has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the Council in October and Year 7 place offers will be sent out in March the following year.

 

 

Maidstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Most Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam; this Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

Paper 1: This is an hour-long exam, split into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

Paper 2: This is a 60-minute test, focusing on reasoning and is split into three sections:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • Spatial reasoning

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which might be referred to during borderline or appeal cases.

 

If your son is going to sit the Kent Test, read our article on how to prepare him for the exam, including some sample questions.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Maidstone Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As Kent is the largest and most competitive grammar school area in England, it’s imperative to make the most of the time and resources available to your son in the lead-up to the Kent Test if he is going to secure a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School.

 

Your son must be thoroughly prepared and know what to expect from the exam structure and content. One of the most effective ways of improving your son’s performance in the exam is to use practice papers. These papers are a good way of highlighting weaker areas quickly, so introduce them early in your child’s revision for the 11 Plus.

 

To help your son gain a Year 7 place at Maidstone Grammar School, we have created and extensively tested three practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

Also, if your son needs additional practice ahead of his 11+, try a selection of our subject-specific practice exam papers below:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Maidstone Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of The Latymer School 11 Plus exam

Based in Edmonton, Greater London, The Latymer School is a selective, co-educational grammar. Founded in 1624, it is the only grammar school in Enfield and currently teaches over 1,300 pupils aged 11-18. In recent years, The Latymer School has featured near the top of league tables and is considered one of the UK’s best state schools.

 

Pupils are split across six houses that compete with each other throughout the school year in a variety of competitions including drama, arts and sport. The winning house lays claim to the house trophy, the Dormer Shield.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Latymer School

 

 

Address: Latymer School, Haselbury Road, London N9 9TN

County: Hertfordshire/London Borough of Enfield

Admissions Info: office@latymer.co.uk, 0208 807 4037

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,369

Number of Places in Year 7: 186

Open Day Date: June

Exam Dates: July (Round One) and September (Round Two)

Exam Board Type: Part One: GL Assessment / Part Two: set by the school

 

 

The Latymer School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to The Latymer School for Year 7 is by academic selection, following an 11 Plus exam. The school receives over 10 applications for every Year 7 place. Parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s tours to ensure that Latymer is a good fit for the pupil before applying for a place.

 

In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Pupils with an Education Health & Care Plan
  2. A looked after child or previously looked after child
  3. A maximum of 20 applicants from the ‘Inner Area’ who show exceptional musical talent
  4. Students from the ‘inner area’ (maximum of 20) who are eligible for Pupil Premium.

 

Explanation of the ‘Inner Area’ and more details about the oversubscription criteria can be found here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Latymer School

 

 

In order to apply for a place at Latymer, parents are required to complete and return the school’s online registration form as well as the local authority common application form (CAF).

 

Parents should take note of the school and local authority’s application dates, as late applications will not be accepted. If parents do not complete the school’s entry form on time, their child will not be able to take the entrance exam.

 

 

The Latymer School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Latymer School 11+ test consists of two parts:

 

  • Part One: Mathematics and Verbal Reasoning. All applicants will be invited to take this test, which is multiple-choice and with each paper lasting for approximately 50 minutes.  This test will take place in July.

 

Following part one, only the top 650 ranked candidates in the tests will be invited to sit part two, a written English test.

 

  • Part Two: The English test is split into two sections. Section one lasts 30 minutes and will consist of a reading comprehension. Section two also lasts 30 minutes and will be a written paper, requiring pupils to tell a story and show a good level of writing skill. This test will take place in September.

 

How to Prepare for The Latymer School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As a top-performing UK grammar school, competition for Year 7 places at The Latymer School is incredibly strong. The school is looking for academic talent and has set a two-part 11+ exam to ensure candidates are challenged and examined rigorously. With a good 11 Plus study plan, your child should be able to rise to that challenge and approach the exam calmly and confidently.

 

To prepare for The Latymer School 11+, make sure your child works on their Verbal Reasoning skills and read our 11 Plus guide to maths. Whatever your child’s current attainment, they can significantly improve by using practice exam papers. Any prior practice of the skills tested in the Latymer entrance exam will be of huge advantage to your child, so review the 11+ practice papers available.

 

We have an array of practice papers specifically designed to help your child  build their confidence ahead of the Latymer School 11 Plus exam, in particular we would recommend:

 

Part 1

 

11+ GL-style Mathematics Pack 1 

11+ GL-style Mathematics Pack 2

11+ GL-style Problem Solving

11+ GL-style Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ GL-style Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

 

Part 2

 

11+ Spelling

11+ English (Open Answer) Pack 1

11+ English (Open Answer) Pack 2

 

The information provided about The Latymer School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Lawrence Sheriff School website

Founded in 1878, Lawrence Sheriff School (LSS) is a boys-only grammar located in Rugby, Warwickshire. In 2014, LSS became an academy and currently educates over 800 boys from the ages of 11-18.

 

The school has seen substantial investment in recent years to improve its facilities. It is now home to new rugby pitches and also has a regional and local table tennis centre on campus.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lawrence Sheriff School

 

 

Address: Lawrence Sheriff School, Clifton Road, Rugby CV21 3AG

County: Warwickshire

Admissions Info: lss@lawrencesheriffschool.com, 01788 542074

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 896

Number of Places in Year 7: approximately 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All 120 Year 7 LSS places will be allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Before applying for a place, it is suggested that parents visit the school during its June open day. Here, parents will be able to ask questions about the admissions process and prospective pupils can learn more about the school and its learning environment.

 

Lawrence Sheriff School tends to be oversubscribed for Year 7 places, and uses the following criteria to determine priority:

 

  1. Looked after children or previously looked after children
  2. Children in receipt of the Pupil Premium (limited to 10 places)
  3. Children living in the Eastern Area of Warwickshire, who achieve the Automatic Qualifying Score or above (limited to 55 places)
  4. Children living in the priority circle (the centre of which is the Rugby Water Tower and has a radius of 10.004 miles – this also includes the Eastern Area) who achieve the Automatic Qualifying Score or above (limited to 55 places)
  5. Other children living inside or outside of the priority areas who achieve the Automatic Qualifying Score or above

 

For further information about Lawrence Sheriff School’s admission process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Lawrence Sheriff School

 

 

The admissions service at Warwickshire County Council coordinates all Year 7 entry to Lawrence Sheriff School. This service operates the same entrance test procedure as The Grammar Schools in Birmingham Consortium.

 

To apply for entry to the school, parents must register their son for the school’s entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF). The school’s admissions policy states that late 11+ registrations will not be considered in the first round of offers.

 

Parents will be notified of results via post from mid-October and the first round of place allocations will be available from the beginning of March.

 

 

Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that each last 45 minutes. Both are made-up of a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning
  • Numeracy

 

Parents should be aware that the Verbal Reasoning exam has an English component, which includes a comprehension and cloze test. The Maths exam consists of a numeracy test, which focuses on mental arithmetic and problem-solving.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Lawrence Sheriff School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

For your son to have the best possible chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Warwickshire’s Lawrence Sheriff School, he must be willing to invest additional time in revision on top of his usual school work routine. The good news is that most children respond better to short bursts of revision, so just 20 minutes a day can make a real difference to your son’s knowledge and ability to prepare for the exam.

 

One of the best ways of highlighting any knowledge gaps quickly is to use practice exam papers with your son. These 11+ papers come complete with answers, enabling you to accurately measure your child’s performance and track their improvements. If your son is in the process of preparing for the Lawrence Sheriff School, we have several 11 Plus practice papers that are specifically designed to help him:

 

 

The information provided about Lawrence Sheriff School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Langley Grammar School website

Located in Slough, Berkshire, Langley Grammar School is a co-educational grammar that gained academy status in 2011. Langley Grammar was first established in 1956 and now teaches over 1,000 pupils aged 11-18.

 

Langley Grammar considers itself to be an innovative school that not only provides its pupils with a good academic grounding, but also one that gives focus to the skills needed for navigating the modern world. The school gives pupils the opportunity to partake in a variety of extracurricular activities such as sport, music and drama.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Langley Grammar School

 

 

Address: Langley Grammar School, Reddington Drive, Langley SL3 7QS

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: school@lgs.slough.sch.uk, 01753 598300

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,045 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 180

Open Day Date: May and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Langley Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

There are currently 180 Year 7 places available at Langley Grammar School, with all places determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. As per other grammar schools within the Slough area, Langley hosts a parents-only information evening in May. This event is not suitable for children and no tours of the school will be given. Rather, the event aims to give parents a detailed explanation of the school’s admission process. Children are permitted to attend the school’s open evening in September.

 

Year 7 admissions to Langley Grammar School are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date.

 

For a full breakdown of Langley’s oversubscription criteria or more information about the school’s admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Langley Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Langley Grammar School, parents must register their child with the Slough Consortium. Next, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF), which can be done online via Slough County Council.

 

As Langley Grammar School follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure your child is registered in time for the 11 Plus exam.

 

 

Langley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Langley Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. All four schools within the Slough Consortium use the same test papers, which test children’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning skills.

 

Parents will receive online results of their child’s 11+ exam in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF and final place allocations will be published in March.

 

How to Prepare for the Langley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Sitting a formal exam will likely cause a child to feel nervous, but if a solid study plan is put in place early on, it’s possible to keep levels of anxiety to a minimum.

Ensure that your child is studying regularly – just 20 minutes every day can really make a difference to their understanding of the required subjects.

 

Introduce practice exam papers into your child’s study routine early on and when appropriate for your child, take these practice papers under timed conditions. Creating a ‘mock exam’ environment will be excellent practice for the actual exam.

 

To help your child to prepare for the Langley Grammar School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ Multiple-Choice Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Spelling

 

If your child’s 11+ is looming and the study plan hasn’t gone as well as you’d hoped, don’t worry; read our guide to last minute preparation for the 11 Plus exam.

 

The information provided about Langley Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Lancaster Royal Grammar School website

Founded in 1235, Lancaster Royal Grammar School (LRGS) is a boys-only grammar located in the Lancashire city of Lancaster. Teaching over 1,000 boys aged 11-18, in 2011, LRGS became an academy. One of the UK’s state boarding schools, LRGS is known for its academic and sporting successes.

 

For an overview of the school’s sporting activities, take a look at this short collection of clips from LRGS’s sports day:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lancaster Royal Grammar School

 

 

Address: Lancaster Royal Grammar School, East Road, Lancaster LA1 3EF

County: Lancashire

Admissions Info: esimmill@lrgs.org.uk, 01524 580629

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,046 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (plus 24 boarding)

Open Day Date: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School has 150 day places available in Year 7. Admission to the school at this stage is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. The school hosts an open day in June and an information evening for parents in September. At the information evening, parents can learn more about the school’s values, meet the staff and find out more about the Year 7 admission process.

 

The school welcomes boys from within the Lancaster catchment area, and from further afield – especially if they are considering a boarding place. However, the school prioritises students that are, or have been in Looked After care within the City of Lancaster.

 

For more information about Lancaster Royal Grammar School’s 11+ admissions criteria visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Lancaster Royal Grammar School

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School is very clear about its 11 Plus application process. Parents must complete two application forms:

 

  1. The LRGS application form, which can be completed online
  2. The Local Authority (LA) application form – depending on where you live, this can be found via an online search for your LA

 

LRGS only accepts late applications with good reason.

 

Parents will receive notification of their child’s 11+ results in October and Lancashire LA will publish allocation places in March of the following year.

 

 

Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam for Lancaster Royal Grammar School consists of three multiple-choice papers and are based on the KS2 syllabus:

 

  • English – this 45-minute paper consists of 56 questions, including two passages with various questions to test pupils’ spelling, punctuation and grammar
  • Mathematics – a 50-minute paper consisting of 50 questions
  • Verbal Reasoning – a 50-minute test with 80 questions

 

 

How to Prepare for the Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

For your son to gain a Year 7 place at Lancaster Royal Grammar School, he must be willing to invest time in revision and preparation. Our 11 Plus guide for parents is an excellent starting point, as it will give you an overview of what the exam could contain.

 

Year 7 places at LRGS are competitive, so give your son a head start with early exam practice. The earlier you start revision, the more opportunities you will have to work on your son’s weaker subjects.

 

Practice test papers are an ideal way of preparing your child for the 11 Plus exam at LRGS. The papers are proven to be an effective way of familiarising students with the layout of the exam and will also help them to improve their time management skills.

 

For the Lancaster Royal Grammar School 11 Plus exam, we specifically recommend the following resources that use the same style and question types as the actual 11+ exam:

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 3(GL-style)

11+ English: Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving (GL-style)

 

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Lancaster Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Lancaster Girls' Grammar School website

Founded in 1907, Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School (LGGS) is a selective grammar that teaches approximately 900 girls aged 11-18. Now an academy, LGGS has been both a Technology College and a Language College.

 

LGGS consistently performs well in school league tables and has an excellent reputation for promoting high academic achievement, whilst maintaining a relaxed atmosphere. The school’s four houses are named after towns twinned with Lancaster: Aalbord, Lublin, Perpignan and Rendsburg.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School

 

 

Address: Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School, Regent Street, Lancaster LA1 1SF

County: Lancashire

Admissions Info: lggs@lggs.lancs.sch.uk, 01524 581661

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 904 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 140

Open Evening Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Lancashire GL Assessment 11 Plus

 

Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School is solely determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 140 places allocated to Year 7 students, although this figure can vary slightly year-to-year. In June, LGGS hosts an open evening for parents and prospective pupils, where you can meet the Headteacher and learn more about the school’s admission process.

 

The school deals with its Year 7 admissions directly. In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children who permanently live within the city of Lancaster at the time of application and are looked after children, or previously looked after children.
  2. Children who permanently live within the city of Lancaster at the time of application and who are eligible for the Pupil Premium.
  3. Children who permanently live within the city of Lancaster.
  4. All other applicants who live outside of the city of Lancaster who achieve the required standard.

 

Read the school’s admissions booklet for more information about its admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School

 

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11+ should do so before the exam date. The registration form can be downloaded via the school’s website.

 

Parents must complete their Local Authority’s Common Application Form (CAF) to ensure their daughter is considered for a Year 7 place. Children will sit the exam in September and parents will receive results in October.

 

Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus exam is set by GL Assessment. Girls must sit three multiple-choice tests that cover:

 

  • Mathematics – this test runs for 50-minutes and consists of 50 questions
  • Verbal Reasoning – this test is 50-minutes long and consists of 80 questions
  • English – this test is 45-minutes long and consists of 56 questions

 

All questions contained within these exams are based on the Key Stage 2 curriculum.

 

How to Prepare for the Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School consistently features in the top 20 secondary schools in the UK, it’s little surprise that it is a very popular choice with parents. To maximise your daughter’s chances of success in the LGGS 11 Plus exam, you need to be organised. For an overview of the exam, have a read of our 11 Plus guide for parents, which will give you a better understanding of what your daughter can expect from the tests.

 

If your daughter’s progress has plateaued, or you’ve noticed knowledge gaps in her learning, try practice test papers. They’re a great way of preparing your child for the 11 Plus exam at LGGS because they help familiarise students with the layout of the tests and can help improve time management.

 

For the Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Shakespeare’s School exam

Located in Warwickshire’s market town of Stratford-upon-Avon, King Edward VI School (K.E.S) is a boys’ grammar, with girls attending its sixth form since 2013. Known as ‘Shakespeare’s School’, it’s believed that William Shakespeare attended the facility, although there there’s little supporting evidence. K.E.S became an academy in 2011 and currently teaches over 500 pupils.

 

Pupils participate in a variety of extracurricular activities, with notable emphasis placed on sports, including rugby, fencing and rowing.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI School, Church Street, Stratford-upon-Avon CV37 6HB

County: Warwickshire

Admissions Info: office@kes.net, 01789 293351

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 558 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 87

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Warwickshire CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

King Edward VI School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

With just 87 places available, parents are firmly encouraged to ensure that K.E.S is the right educational environment for their son before applying. By attending the school’s open day in June, both parents and prospective pupils will have the opportunity to see the school grounds and meet members of staff.

 

Should there be more applications than available places in Year 7, the school applies its oversubscription criteria, outlined here, in order of priority.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI School

 

 

Warwickshire Admissions is responsible for Year 7 entry to King Edward VI School. To apply, parents must register their son for the school’s entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF). The school’s admissions policy states that late 11+ registrations will not be considered in the first round of offers. In addition to registering for the exam, Warwickshire Admissions require evidence of the child’s home address.

 

Parents will be notified of results via post from mid-October and the first round of place allocations will be available from the beginning of March.

 

 

King Edward VI School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI School 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last for approximately 50 minutes each. They contain a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering the following subjects:

The Verbal Reasoning exam includes an English component, which consists of a comprehension and cloze test. The maths exam involves a numeracy test, which tests for ability in mental arithmetic and problem-solving questions. Each answer sheet is marked electronically for accuracy.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

King Edward VI School is consistently oversubscribed in Year 7, so your son should follow a good 11 Plus study plan in order to increase his chances of gaining one of the school’s 87 places.

 

Practice exam papers are a great way to get your son used to the format of the K.E.S 11 Plus and improve his time management skills ahead of the tests. Prior practice of the skills tested in the entrance exam will be of a huge advantage to your son.

 

Our practice papers come complete with answers, enabling you to accurately measure your child’s performance and track their progress in the lead-up to the exam. We have several 11 Plus practice papers that can help your child prepare for entry to King Edward VI School.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources for the Warwickshire 11 plus:

 

The information provided about King Edward VI School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Handsworth School website

Founded in 1883, King Edward VI Handsworth School is a girls-only selective grammar located in Birmingham. Part of the Foundation of the Schools of King Edward VI, over 900 girls currently attend the school and it is considered one of the top state schools in the UK.

 

King Edward VI Handsworth offers pupils a broad curriculum and although it has a rich history, it nevertheless considers itself to be a forward-thinking and modern teaching facility.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Handsworth School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Handsworth School, Rose Hill Road, B21 9AR

County: Birmingham, West Midlands

Admissions Info: office@kingedwardvi.bham.sch.uk, 0121 554 2342

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 912 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Date: June / September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Handsworth School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

King Edward VI Hansdworth School for Girls follows the admission criteria of the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium, along with seven other grammar schools in the area. Only pupils who reach the required standard via the 11+ entrance exam will be considered for entry.

 

The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the CEM 11 Plus exam. Pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ to be eligible for admission. However, attaining the qualifying score does not guarantee your daughter a place as the school only has 160 Year 7 places.

 

If test results are equal, priority will be given to:

 

  1. Looked after children and previously looked after children who achieve the qualifying score
  2. Children registered for Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score (limited to 32 places)
  3. Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Handsworth School

 

 

In order to apply for a place at the school, parents must register their daughter with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium using the online application form. Parents must also complete a Local Authority Preference form for their daughter to be considered for a grammar school place in Birmingham.

 

11 Plus test results will be released in October, with official places allocated in the following March.

 

 

King Edward VI Handsworth School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

All eight grammar schools across Birmingham sit the same 11 Plus exam, including prospective pupils at King Edward VI Handsworth School. The exam consists of two papers, which both last approximately 50 minutes, with additional time for instructions. The two papers are split into sections that cover the following topics:

 

 

The majority of the questions in these papers are multiple-choice and children will be provided with a separate answer sheet.

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Handsworth School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If King Edward VI Handsworth School is your daughter’s first choice school at Year 7, you must ensure that she has all the necessary resources to perform well in the 11 Plus exam. Competition for its 160 places at this stage is fierce so it’s important to set a revision timetable with your daughter that covers all the required subjects. A timetable can also help ensure that your daughter covers everything she’ll need to know for the exam, without being overworked.

 

To be in with a good chance of gaining a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Handsworth School, we’d suggest using practice exam papers; they are a proven method of helping revision at 11 Plus level.

 

We would specifically recommend the following practice resources for the King Edward VI Handsworth School 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Handsworth School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth website

King Edward VI Grammar School (KEVIGS), Louth is a co-educational facility established in 1276. Originally a boys’ school, girls have attended since 1965 when the local girls’ school joined with KEVIGS.

 

Located in the Lincolnshire market town of Louth, KEVIGS teaches approximately 800 pupils aged 11-18, and became an academy in 2015.

 

For an insight into the school’s extracurricular activities, watch this short promotional video showcasing its sports day:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Grammar School, Edward Street, Louth LN11 9LL

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: rhona.adam@kevigs.lincs.sch.uk, 01507 600456

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 795

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

 

King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to KEVIGS in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 120 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school strongly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open evenings. Parents can also arrange individual tours.

 

KEVIGS is a member of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and the Local Authority co-ordinates the school’s admissions at Year 7.

 

With 120 places available, should KEVIGS be oversubscribed, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children, or previously looked after children
  2. The siblings of children who will still be attending King Edward VI when the child is due to start
  3. Eligible children in Year 6 who live within the traditional catchment area
  4. Candidates with the highest test scores

 

If you have more questions about KEVIGS’s admission process at Year 7, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth

 

 

Parents must download and complete a registration form from the school’s website in the first instance. Once a child has sat the 11+ in September, results will be sent to parents by the LA in October. Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) directly via the LA website. Failure to do so will mean your child will not be considered for a grammar school place in Lincolnshire. Parents are advised by the school to place King Edward’s as their number one preference on the CAF to maximise their child’s chances of gaining a place in Year 7.

 

King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth  11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth must sit two 11+ tests on two separate dates. These exams are multiple-choice and students will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions. Questions are divided into 15 or more sections, with 5/6 questions in each section.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Questions must be answered one section at a time, with seven minutes allocated for each section. Pupils cannot move onto the next section until they are told to do so.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While it’s understandable that some children worry about sitting their 11+, the reality is that with a good revision timetable and plenty of practice, there shouldn’t be anything to be concerned about. King Edward VI Grammar School in Louth is consistently oversubscribed for Year 7 places, so it’s important to allow your child plenty of time to revise for the 11 Plus exam. Regular revision will highlight any knowledge gaps early on and will also improve your child’s confidence.

 

The King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth 11 Plus focuses on your child’s reasoning skills, so take a look at these articles to help prepare them:

 

 

Have you considered practice exam papers? These should be introduced into your child’s revision timetable early on. Your child will need excellent time management skills to complete the 11+ GL Assessment and practice papers can help with this.

 

The 11+ practice papers below cover all the required question types that your child will face in the King Edward VI Grammar School exam. Designed to challenge your child, once the test is complete, you will receive scored feedback immediately. If your child is set to sit the KEVIGS in Year 6, we would fully recommend the following practice papers:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Grammar School, Louth was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Photo of a pen and notepad on a desk

KS2 SATs Maths tests your child’s understanding of numbers and mathematical problem-solving. But for some children, this knowledge doesn’t come easily and this can lead to anxiety that can impact their final SATs score. In this article, we share everything you need to know about the KS2 SATs Maths test, including what to focus your child’s revision sessions on and how to prepare for the exam itself.

 

KS2 Maths: Understanding the Test

 

 

Towards the end of Year 6, all children in the UK sit a Key Stage 2 Maths SATs exam. There are three test papers in total, consisting of:

  • Paper 1 – arithmetic (30 minutes)

This arithmetic paper is made up of around 36 number-focused questions, that challenge pupils to use addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. In this paper, children will be required to use percentages, fractions and decimals.

  • Paper 2 – reasoning (40 minutes)
  • Paper 3 – reasoning (40 minutes)

Both of these reasoning papers consist of around 20 problem-solving questions, in which children must show solid mathematical knowledge by solving various problems and puzzles.

 

 

KS2 SATs Maths: Areas to Focus On

Photo of a numeracy text paper

 

For your child to perform well in the Maths SATs at KS2, they are required to understand a variety of mathematical topics. Although not an exhaustive list, below are some of the topics your child could be tested on during the exam:

 

  • Addition and Subtraction
  • Algebra
  • Fractions, Decimals and Percentages
  • Fractions – equivalent, adding, subtracting, improper and mixed
  • Geometry – properties of shapes and position and movement
  • Measurement – metric units, area, perimeter
  • Measurement – time and roman numerals
  • Multiplication and Division
  • Number and Place Value
  • Ratio and Proportion
  • Statistics

 

With such a broad scope, it’s important that your child understands basic mathematical concepts such as addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, before introducing more difficult topics such as algebra and ratio.

 

If your child is continually struggling with a particular question type, work out why that is: what skill are they lacking? Perhaps they don’t know their times tables, or are unable to convert units of measurement. Practice SATs papers can give you a greater knowledge of your child’s weaker topics, well ahead of the SATs exam date.

 

 

KS2 SAT Maths: How to Prepare Your Child

Numeracy test puzzles

 

If you are preparing your child for their KS2 SATs, take a look at our preparation tips. When it comes to KS2 Maths revision, you can simply focus your child’s revision sessions to include the skills they will need for the exam. Why not try a combination of the revision strategies below?

 

Use Revision Cards

 

 

Plenty of mathematical topics lend themselves well to visuals, which can help learners who prefer this learning technique. Revision cards can help more interactive children to visualise their knowledge more easily.

 

Write a Maths Revision Timetable

 

 

Whether this is part of an overall study plan, or is a separate revision timetable, make sure your child is committing enough time to their maths study. Again, this can be more of a visual timetable with a wall planner, or can be a very simple spreadsheet that is easy for your child to follow from session-to-session.

 

Use Games to Make it Fun

 

 

A great way to maintain your child’s motivation for SATs study is through revision games. Revising number facts and mental arithmetic through quizzes or roleplay will help to keep them engaged for longer.

 

 

Use Practice Papers

 

 

It’s best to approach KS2 SATs revision ‘little and often’; perhaps introduce one practice SATs paper per week at first and then build up to more as the exam date gets closer. These papers will boost your child’s confidence ahead of the Maths SAT, as they will have acquired a greater knowledge of how the exam paper will be laid out and what format it will take. If your child is approaching Year 6 and will soon be sitting the KS2 SATs Maths exam, we would recommend the following practice papers:

 

Key Stage 2 SATs Practice Test 1

Key Stage 2 SATs Practice Test 2

 

Relax

 

SATs are important, but make sure that your child isn’t overworking or at risk of burning out. Encourage them to get outside and be active, to eat well and to get plenty of good quality sleep. They’ll need it if they are going to succeed in their KS2 SATs!

 

Related Posts:

KS2 SATs Preparation Tips

SATs Advice for Parents

 

Image sources:

Timy Penburg

Chaparral

Home School Mom

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Five Ways School

King Edward VI Five Ways (KEFW) is a Birmingham-based selective grammar school for boys and girls aged 11-18. Founded in 1883, it moved to its current location in Bartley Green in 1958.

Over 1,100 students are divided into four houses from Year 7. Each student aims to gain as many house points as possible throughout the school year, with a hope of winning the House Championship.

 

If you’d like to learn more about life at King Edward VI Five Ways School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Five Ways School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Five Ways School, Scotland Lane, Bartley Green, Birmingham B32 4BT

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: office@kefw.org, 0121 475 3535

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,172 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus

 

King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Since 2011, all grammar schools in Birmingham follow the admissions criteria of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. At King Edward VI Five Ways School, all prospective Year 7 students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Due to substantial competition, not every child who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place at KEFW.

 

Across grammar schools in the West Midlands, applicants are ranked according to their test score. If test scores are equal, priority is given to students who meet the following criteria:

 

  1. Looked After Children or Previously Looked After Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score (limited to 36 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score

 

More information about the admission policy at King Edward VI Five Ways can be found on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Five Ways School

 

 

If you would like your child to be considered for one of KEFW’s 180 Year 7 places, you must register online with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Parents also need to complete a Local Authority Preference form.

 

Exam results will be published in October, following the 11+ exam in September, although places will not be allocated until March the following year.

 

King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

All eight grammar schools in Birmingham hold the same 11 Plus exam on the same day in September. The exam consists of two 50-minute tests that cover the following subjects:

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children will be required to answer on a separate sheet. All marks are standardised, to account for age differences, and are then added together.

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Some children find the thought of sitting the 11 Plus exam an intimidating prospect, but with parental support and good revision techniques, the test itself needn’t cause undue worry in your household.

 

The King Edward Schools in Birmingham are hugely oversubscribed and KEFW is no different. For your child to have the best chance of gaining one of its 180 Year 7 places, they must do plenty of 11 Plus revision. The CEM 11+ exam requires excellent time management skills if pupils are going to complete all questions, so make sure your child takes practice test papers under timed conditions.

 

For the King Edward VI Five Ways School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Five Ways School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls website

King Edward VI (KEVI) Camp Hill School for Girls was founded in 1883 and currently teaches girls aged 11 to 18. Located in the Birmingham suburb of Kings Heath, the school shares its campus with King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys.

 

Over 800 girls are provided with a high-quality education at Camp Hill School for Girls and its students regularly produce outstanding exam results, compared with other schools in the UK.

 

The school specialises in Computing, Languages and Mathematics and offers pupils first-class facilities, including specialist classrooms, a large sports hall and extensive grounds for extracurricular activities.

 

For an insight into life as a student at King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls

 

 

Address: King Edward VI School Camp Hill for Girls, Vicarage Road, Kings Heath, Birmingham B14 7QJ

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: head@kechg.org.uk, 0121 444 2150

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 863

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: July and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All of Birmingham’s eight grammar schools follow the admissions criteria of the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Only pupils who reach the required standard via the 11+ entrance exam will be considered for entry to Camp Hill School for Girls.

 

All prospective grammar school students in Birmingham are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. To be eligible for admission, pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam. Parents should note however, that attainment of the qualifying score doesn’t necessarily guarantee students a place at Camp Hill School for Girls.

 

If you would like to learn more about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls’ admission policy, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls, parents must register their daughter directly with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Parents also need to complete a Local Authority (LA) Preference form; parents can choose up to six schools on this form.

 

Parents should receive 11 Plus test results in October, although places will not be allocated until March the following year.

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11+ exam consists of two papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes, with additional time for instructions. The papers are split into individually-timed sections, as follows:

 

 

Most of the questions are multiple-choice and are fully age-standardised, to ensure fairness.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

For children unfamiliar with the examination process, the thought of the 11 Plus can be a daunting one and it can be an anxious time for parents too. However, with a good revision plan and use of the right practice resources, there is every chance that your daughter will perform well in the marked assessments.

 

Whatever your daughter’s academic ability, you should set a solid revision plan well ahead of the exam date. All children benefit from regular exam practice sessions, whatever their natural attainment. For the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls’ 11 Plus test, it would be a good idea to include practice exam papers in your daughter’s study plan.

 

Practice papers allow pupils to get a better idea of the types of questions they can expect in the exam and they also provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities. If you spot any weaker skills or subjects, you can simply invest more time in these areas in the build-up to exam day.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we have several 11+ practice papers suitable for those sitting the CEM 11 Plus exam for King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys website

Founded in 1883, King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys is a selective boys’ grammar school in Birmingham. Camp Hill Boys specialises in Applied Learning, Mathematics and Science and is consistently rated as one of the most academically-successful schools in the UK.

 

In 1956, Camp Hill Boys moved to its current site in Kings Heath and now shares a campus with King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls, its sister school. Despite its academic success, Camp Hill Boys doesn’t rest on its reputation; it provides pupils with a well-rounded education and is always looking to build on and improve its sports teams and school facilities

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys

 

 

Address: King Edward VI School Camp Hill for Boys, Vicarage Road, Kings Heath, Birmingham B14 7QJ

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: enquiry@camphillboys.bham.sch.uk, 0121 444 3188

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 803

Number of Places in Year 7: 95

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys is part of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium, which sets the admissions criteria in the West Midlands. Admission to Camp Hill for Boys is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam and as a highly selective school; only pupils who reach the required standard via this assessment will be considered for a Year 7 place.

 

As per all grammar schools in Birmingham, prospective Year 7 students at Camp Hill Boys are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Pupils must achieve the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam to be considered for a place. Parents should be aware though, that due to oversubscription, not every boy who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place.

 

In the likely event of oversubscription, Camp Hill Boys will apply the following criteria to assign places, in order of priority:

 

  1. Looked After Children or Previously Looked After Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score
  2. Children attracting the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score (limited to 24 places)
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score

 

Find out more about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ admission policy.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys, parents must first register their son with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Next, parents should complete a Local Authority (LA) Preference form, where they can name up to six preferred schools. It is the responsibility of the LA to consider each application.

 

The local LA will send out 11 Plus test results in early March.

 

 

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ 11+ exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes. The papers are split into individually-timed sections that cover the following subjects:

 

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children are required to answer on a separate sheet. The tests are fully age-standardised, to take into account age differences.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

In recent years, Camp Hill School for Boys has revealed that they receive 1,000 applications for their 120 Year 7 places. With an excellent reputation for academic achievement, that’s no surprise. This means that your son will have to be fully-prepared for his 11 Plus exam in order to gain a place.

 

Whether your son has natural academic talent, or struggles in particular subjects, it’s essential to set a 11 Plus revision plan well ahead of the actual exam. To prepare your son for the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ 11+ exam, consider using practice test papers.

 

The CEM (Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) 11 Plus exam from University of Durham requires pupils to answer its questions quickly and confidently, without much hesitation. In order to complete the papers within the allocated time, children usually need to improve their time management skills and this is something practice exam papers can help with.

 

If your son is sitting the King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys’ 11 Plus exam, arm him with the necessary resources. We would highly recommend the following practice papers:

 

 

If your son responds well to this practice, or has a weaker subject that requires more work, take a look at our complete selection of 11 Plus practice exam papers.

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Aston School website

Founded in 1883, Birmingham-based King Edward VI Aston School is a boys’ grammar and specialist sports college. One of the seven schools that make up the Foundation of the Schools of King Edward VI, Aston teaches over 750 boys aged 11-18.

 

As expected of a sports college, King Edward VI Aston School places particular emphasis on a range of sporting activities and also focuses attention on more creative outlets, such as music and drama.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Aston School

 

 

Address: King Edward VI Aston School, Frederick Road, Aston, Birmingham B6 6DJ

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: enquiry@keaston.bham.sch.uk,  0121 327 1130

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 757 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: Various: July – October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All grammar schools in Birmingham follow the admissions criteria of The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium. Only pupils who reach the required standard via an 11 Plus entrance exam will be considered for entry to King Edward VI Aston School.

 

In line with the Consortium’s guidelines, prospective Year 7 students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. Pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam to be considered for a place. However, due to the popularity of King Edward VI Aston School, not every child who achieves the qualifying score can be offered a place.

 

Applicants are ranked according to their test score and, if test scores are equal, places will be prioritised as follows:

 

  1. Looked After Children or Previously Looked After Children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score.
  2. Children attracting the Pupil Premium who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score (limited to 30 places).
  3. Other children who achieve the qualifying score by rank order of standardised score.

 

More information about the admission policy of King Edward VI Aston School can be found on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Aston School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI Aston School, parents must register their child directly with the Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium; this can be done online. Parents are also obligated to complete a Local Authority Preference form.

 

Parents and carers will receive their son’s 11 Plus test results in October, with Year 7 places allocated early, the following March.

 

 

King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The King Edward VI Aston School exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes. The papers are split into individually timed sections that cover:

 

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children will be required to answer on a separate sheet.

 

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To maximise your child’s chances of success in the King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus exam, you need to be organised and motivate your son to stick to a study plan. Investing time early in his preparation will help to keep stress levels lower as the exam date approaches. Take a look at our 11 Plus guide for parents, which will give you an overview of the exam and what to expect of the 11+ process from start to finish.

 

Birmingham is a very competitive grammar school area and King Edward VI Aston School is usually oversubscribed. So, 11 Plus revision is a must if your son is going to gain a place at the school. Practice test papers are a great way of preparing your child for the 11 Plus exam.

 

Your son will need to have excellent time management for the CEM 11+ Plus exam, as it is relatively fast-paced. Our practice papers are an effective tool for improving students’ time management skills.

 

For the King Edward VI Aston School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Aston School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Kesteven & Sleaford High School Selective Academy website

Founded in 1902, Kesteven and Sleaford High School (KSHS) is a selective school for girls aged 11-18. The school has academy status and boys can attend in sixth form from age 16.

 

Located in the market town of Seaford in Lincolnshire, KSHS currently teaches over 800 pupils. A member of the Robert Carre Trust, Ofsted praised KSHS’s ‘calm and purposeful atmosphere’ in its 2013 report.

 

For an insight into academic life at Kesteven & Sleaford High School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Kesteven & Sleaford High School

 

 

Address: Kesteven and Sleaford High School, Jermyn Street, Sleaford NG34 7RS

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@kshs.uk, 01529 414044

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 833 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 128

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Kesteven & Sleaford High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. KSHS fully complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangements for Year 7, while the school carries out the 11+ tests.

 

With 128 places available in Year 7, in cases of oversubscription, the school uses the following criteria to determine pupil priority:

 

  1. The child is, or has been in the care of the Local Authority
  2. The child is registered for Pupil Premium
  3. Students who, at the time of admission, have siblings at one of the schools within the Robert Carre Trust
  4. Straight line distance from the home to KSHS, priority will be given to the child living closest to the school

 

If you have more questions about KSHS’s admissions process at Year 7, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Kesteven & Sleaford High School

 

 

Kesteven & Sleaford High School complies with Lincolnshire County Council’s admission arrangements. Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) via the LA website to register their daughter for a 11 Plus exam place. Those living outside of Lincolnshire must return their CAF form to their own LA, who will forward the application to Lincolnshire LA.

 

Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Prospective pupils to Kesteven & Sleaford High School must sit two 11+ exams over two days. These exams are multiple-choice and students will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test consists of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning – this 40-minute test consists of 70 questions and is split into five sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Parents shouldn’t be worried about starting 11 Plus preparation ‘too early’; there’s no such thing. Giving your child plenty of time to study for the exams will not only improve their confidence, but will also allow you to recognise any knowledge gaps that they might have. Children typically respond better to shorter bursts of study practice, compared with sizeable chunks, so help them to prepare for the 11 Plus exam by creating a study plan that’s achievable.

 

Our 11 Plus guide for Parents will help to answer any burning questions you might have about the exam. As the Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus focuses on reasoning skills, your daughter should benefit from these articles:

 

 

Practice exam papers should also be introduced into your child’s revision timetable early on. These papers can help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, allowing you to commit additional time to areas that need improvement. They can also help improve your daughter’s time management skills.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Kesteven & Sleaford High School 11 Plus exam. We would specifically recommend the following useful resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Kesteven & Sleaford High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Kesteven & Grantham Girls' School website

Founded in 1910, Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School (KGGS) is a girls-only grammar school located in the Lincolnshire market town of Grantham. A selective academy, KGGS currently teaches over 1,100 girls aged 11-18.

 

Students are split across six houses that compete with each other across the school year in events such as sports, public speaking and dance shows.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School

 

 

Address: Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School, Sandon Road, Grantham NG31 9AU

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: mailto@kggs.org, 01476 563017

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,157 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 175

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools, although it coordinates its 11+ testing directly. With 175 places available at Year 7, in the event of oversubscription, the school will apply the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. The child is in the care of the local authority or has previously been in care.
  2. The child has a sibling at the school at the time of application.
  3. Children living nearest to the school.

 

For more information about KGGS’s admissions process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School, parents should initially visit the Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest in a place. Next, download and complete the school’s registration form to book your child’s place in the 11 Plus exam.

 

Parents will receive exam results via post in October, ahead of the deadline for returning the parental preference form to the local authority. In March of the following year, the local authority will send out place offers based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School consists of two multiple-choice papers. The Non-Verbal Reasoning test is sat one week after the Verbal Reasoning test.

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Once a section has been completed, students cannot move onto the next one until they are told to do so.

 

How to Prepare for the Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School is a popular Lincolnshire grammar, so parents must prepare their daughter for the 11 Plus exam well ahead of the exam dates. KGGS’s 11 Plus tests focus on reasoning, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

If your daughter is worried about sitting the 11+, practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing her confidence, as they help students become familiar with the layout of the questions. Practice papers can also highlight any time management problems, so consider setting timed papers to help improve these much-needed skills.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School exam. We would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Kesteven & Grantham Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Kendrick School website

Kendrick School is a selective girls’ grammar school located in Berkshire, Reading. Open to over 700 girls aged 11-18, Kendrick became an academy in 2011. A specialist school in Languages, Mathematics and Science, the school has been awarded ‘Outstanding’ in its last four Ofsted inspections.

Offering a broad curriculum, Kendrick School combines traditional and modern learning approaches to ensure its girls are fully prepared for any challenges they might face when they leave the school.

 

For an insight into life at Kendrick School watch this student-shot video, showcasing a ‘day in the life’ of a Kendrick girl:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Kendrick School

 

 

Address: Kendrick Grammar School, London Road, Reading RG1 5BN

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: admin@kendrick.reading.sch.uk, 0118 9015859

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 709 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 95-100

Open Day Date: April

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Kendrick School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Kendrick School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. If you are considering Kendrick as an option for your daughter, you are advised to attend an open event, where you can find out more about the admissions process. Kendrick School is one of a number of grammar schools in the Berkshire area that uses the same 11 plus entrance exam set by CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) by University of Durham.

 

Kendrick School is usually oversubscribed for Year 7 places, in which case, the school applies the following oversubscription criteria, in order of priority:

 

  1. Children who are, or have previously been, looked after.
  2. The permanent home address of the student is within the designated area of the school and the applicant is a Pupil Premium or Service Premium child.
  3. The permanent home address of the student is within the designated area of the school and this home address is the address of the parent(s)/carer(s) and the applicant.
  4. Students whose home address is not in the designated area of the school.

 

For more details about Kendrick School’s admission criteria, please visit the website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Kendrick School

 

 

To register interest for a Year 7 place at Kendrick School, parents must first complete their Local Authority’s (LA) Common Application Form (CAF). To register for the 11+ admissions test itself, parents need to complete a separate application directly with the school. The registration form can be completed online when applications are open. Parents should note that late applications will not be accepted, although the school will consider exceptional circumstances if supportive evidence is provided.

 

 

Kendrick School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Kendrick School 11 Plus exam consists of two individual papers, each lasting 50 minutes. The papers are made up of mixed questions and are mainly multiple-choice, covering:

 

 

Parents will receive results of their child’s 11+ exam in October, before the deadline for the submission of the CAF.

 

How to Prepare for the Kendrick School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If Kendrick School is your child’s first choice, they might feel undue pressure to perform well in the 11+ exam. However, by learning how to study for the 11 Plus exam, your daughter should be able to approach the exam with confidence.

 

At Year 6, most children can only maintain their concentration for half an hour at a time, so approach 11+ revision sessions realistically. After a day at school, revision is likely to be the last thing on your daughter’s mind, so split study sessions into short, manageable blocks.

 

Kendrick School’s 11 Plus exam places a large emphasis on reasoning; if your daughter struggles with this skill (and many children do), read the following articles on how to improve her performance:

 

 

If your daughter encounters problems with time management, introduce practice exam papers into her study routine. Not only will they give her a better idea of how quickly questions should be answered in the allotted time, you will also be able to monitor your child’s progress closely, as immediate feedback is provided for each paper.

 

Our 11 Plus practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Kendrick School exam. To begin with, we would recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Kendrick School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Exam

Herschel Grammar School is a selective, co-educational grammar located in the large Berkshire town of Slough. An academy school, it provides a broad and balanced curriculum to approximately 900 students.

 

Pupils at Herschel Grammar School have consistently produced good examination results in recent years and, according to Ofsted, the school shows ‘significant improvement’ between Year 7 and Year 11.

 

For an insight into academic life at Herschel Grammar School watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Herschel Grammar School

 

 

Address: Herschel Grammar School, Northampton Avenue, Slough SL1 3BW

County: Berkshire

Admissions Info: mail@herschel.slough.sch.uk, 01753 520950

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 879 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

There are currently 150 Year 7 places available at Herschel Grammar School and

admission is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Unlike many other UK grammar schools, Herschel hosts an information evening for parents only. The event, which takes place in May, enables parents to find out more information on the school’s admission process.

 

Admissions to Herschel Grammar School are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date. In cases of oversubscription, the school will adhere to the following criteria, in order of priority:

 

  • Students who are, or have previously been, in looked-after care.
  • Students who have an Education Health and Care Plan and have reached the required standard.
  • Students who have a permanent home address within 10 miles of the school and who are eligible for the Pupil Premium (up to 30 places).

 

Remaining pupils will be ranked in order of their performance in the entrance exams.

 

For more details on Herschel Grammar School’s admission criteria, please visit the website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Herschel Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Herschel Grammar School, parents must register their child with the Slough Consortium in the first instance. Next, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF); this can be done online via Slough County Council.

 

As Herschel Grammar School follows Slough Consortium’s schedule for Year 7 place allocation, parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure your child is registered in time for the 11 Plus exam.

 

 

Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Herschel Grammar School 11+ exam consists of two individual papers, each lasting approximately 60-65 minutes. The papers across all schools in the Slough Consortium are the same and cover a mixture of questions that test Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning.

 

Parents will receive their child’s exam results online in October, before the deadline for submission of the CAF. All results are fully age standardised.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Herschel Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

While it’s understandable that some children are nervous about the idea of sitting the 11 Plus exam, with the right study plan, it needn’t cause any undue anxiety. Similarly, as a parent you might be worried about your child in the tests, but our parents’ guide to the 11 Plus should allay any fears.

 

Don’t leave your child’s 11 Plus preparation until the last minute; set aside time daily for your child to revise. It’s a good idea to introduce practice exam papers into your child’s study routine early on, as these will give them a clearer idea of the structure of the exam. Ensure that your child takes our practice papers under timed conditions, as this will get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

Our 11 Plus practice papers can help your child to prepare for the Herschel Grammar School exam. As a starting point, we would recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Herschel Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

High School for Girls, Gloucester is a selective grammar school for girls aged 11-18. It accepts boys into the Sixth Form and, in total, the school teaches over 800 pupils. High School for Girls is an academy and, due to its excellent exam results, it is consistently ranked as one of the best schools in England.

 

Founded in 1883, High School for Girls divides its pupils into five houses: Barwell, Bearland, Hartland Kyneburga and Mynd. Throughout each year, the houses compete in various sporting activities in an effort to win the school cup.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The High School for Girls

 

 

Address: Gloucester High School for Girls, Denmark Road, Gloucester GL1 3JN

County: Gloucestershire

Admissions Info: office@hsfg.org, 01452 543335

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 849 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: April and June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Gloucestershire)

 

The High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

For your child to be in with a chance of gaining one of the 150 Year 7 places at the school, she must reach the required standard in the 11 Plus exam. As per all the other grammar schools in Gloucestershire, High School for Girls’ Year 7 allocations are dealt with via Gloucestershire County Council. Parents who wish their daughter to sit the test must complete the Gloucestershire Grammar Test Registration Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open.

 

In recent years, there has been three applications for every place, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will give priority to girls scoring highest in the 11 plus examination. Should there be a tie for places after this, the admissions’ authority will allocate places at random.

 

To find out more about High School for Girls’ admissions process, or to see key dates for the process, visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The High School for Girls

 

 

All seven grammar schools in the county of Gloucestershire adhere to the same testing process from CEM (Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring). In order for your daughter to be considered for a place at High School for Girls, you must complete a Common Application Form online via the Local Authority and a test registration form, available online via the school itself.

 

Late registrations will not be accepted, but if a child is unable to sit a test due to illness, an accident, or sudden bereavement, the school may make arrangements for them to sit a ‘Late Test’, although this is not guaranteed.

 

Parents will receive results in October and if your daughter meets the qualifying standard, you can apply for a place at the High School for Girls.

 

 

The High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Since 2013, High School for Girls has adopted the CEM 11 Plus exam, which consists of two papers covering:

 

 

Both tests last 45-50 minutes, are made up of multiple-choice questions and are taken on the same day.

 

Our guide to 11+ exam boards will give you more information about what to expect from the CEM test.

 

 

How to Prepare for The High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

High School for Girls is one of the top selective schools in the UK and competition for Year 7 entry is strong. With only 150 places available, your daughter should prepare for the 11+ exam well ahead of exam day. We know it can be difficult to motivate your child to study regularly for upcoming exams, so keep it fun. Suggest interesting books to read that will improve their comprehension, or adapt some of these revision games to suit their preferred learning style. Soon enough, your child will consider 11 Plus revision as part of a normal day.

 

Have you considered practice exam papers? They can provide effective revision practice and help familiarise your daughter with the layout of the exam. We would recommend:

 

 

Alternatively, if your child requires additional practice in a particular subject, you can choose from our full selection of 11 Plus practice exam papers, available now.
The information provided about the High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Invicta Grammar School is a girls’ grammar based in the Maidstone area of Kent. The school has academy status and became a specialist Business and Enterprise College in 2003. It currently teaches over 1,100 girls aged 11-18, although some boys are admitted into the sixth from age 16.

 

For an insight into academic life at Year 7 at Invicta Grammar Schoo,l watch this short promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Invicta Grammar School

 

 

Address: Invicta Grammar School, Huntsman Lane, Maidstone ME14 5DR

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@invicta.viat.org.uk, 01622 357012

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,141 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 192

Open Day Date: May – July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

 

Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Prospective pupils must sit the Kent Test at 11 Plus and achieve the required standard to be considered for a place in Year 7. The school strongly advises that students and parents arrange a visit before registering and attend one of its open events, which includes familiarisation workshops. At the open events, school staff are on hand to answer any questions regarding the admissions process and parents will get the opportunity to tour the school with a current student.

 

Invicta Grammar School has changed its admissions process in recent years, so parents are advised to read its current admissions policy before registering their daughter for a Year 7 place.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Invicta Grammar School

 

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test at 11+, you must complete an online registration form.

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online. The Council will send assessment results to parents in October and offers will be sent out on National Offer Day in March the following year.

 

If you have any further queries about Invicta Grammar School’s admissions process at Year 7, call the school on 01622 357012 or email office@invicta.viat.org.uk.

 

 

Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

In line with the majority of grammar schools in Kent, Invicta uses the Kent 11 Plus exam. The Kent Exam consists of two multiple-choice papers, with separate answer sheets, in the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that tests pupils’ reasoning abilities. Girls will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long exam that tests English and Maths.
  3. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Invicta Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kent is the largest and most competitive grammar school area in England, so it’s vital that your daughter makes the most of her revision time and resources in the lead-up to the test.

 

Research into exam revision has shown that children are likely to perform better in exams if they have revised over a longer period, rather than have crammed a day or two beforehand. This revision should be broken down into manageable doses, little and often, rather than for extended periods. With regular revision, you should see an uplift in your daughter’s performance.

 

The Kent Test covers a number of subjects and it’s possible that your daughter is stronger in some areas and weaker in others. If that’s the case, we recommend practice exam papers as a good way to highlight those areas early on. Don’t be afraid to introduce these papers at the beginning of your child’s revision for the 11 Plus, as they will allow you to monitor their progress.

 

Pupils sitting the Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at Invicta Grammar School, will benefit from these resources, which have been specifically designed to replicate the Kent 11 Plus exam’s format, structure, style, timings and question types:

 

 

As previously mentioned, if your daughter does require additional revision in a particular subject or two, these practice exam papers are suitable as they contain multiple-chocie questions similar to the ones she will be asked in the exam:

 

The information provided about Invicta Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Ilford County High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Ilford County High School (ICHS) is a selective grammar school located in Barkingside and remains the only boys’ selective school in the London Borough of Redbridge. Founded in 1901, the school currently teaches a broad curriculum to around 1,000 boys, in a challenging yet supportive learning environment.

 

In 2012, the school joined the Leading Edge Partnership, which encourages schools across the UK to learn from each other. The school offers a mix of extracurricular activities to suit their pupils’ wide variety of interests.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ilford County High School

 

 

Address: Ilford County High School, Fremantle Road, Barkingside, Ilford

County: London Borough of Redbridge

Admissions Info: enquiries@ichs.org.uk, 020 8551 6496

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 999 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Ilford County High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 admissions to Ilford County High School are managed by the local authority, the London Borough of Redbridge (LBR). With 180 places available, parents are advised to visit ICHS ahead of registration to ensure it is the right learning environment for their son.

 

ICHS is often oversubscribed for places in Year 7 and in this case, the school uses the following criteria, in order of priority:

 

  • Children who are looked after, or have previously been looked after.
  • Children with exceptional medical or psychological needs.
  • Children with a sibling already at the school.
  • Children who live closest to the school.

 

If you have any questions about ICHS’s admissions process, you must contact the LBR’s Secondary Admissions Department directly on 0208 478 3020.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ilford County High School

 

 

Year 7 admission to Ilford County High School is based on the results of an 11 Plus exam entrance test. Parents must register their child before the closing date via the LBR’s website. LBR does not accept any late applications, even under exceptional circumstances.

 

 

Ilford County High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Ilford County High School uses the CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) exam by the University of Durham. The exam covers the following subjects:

 

 

The tests are multiple-choice and results are fully standardised and age weighted, to ensure fairness for those sitting the exams.

 

How to Prepare for the Ilford County High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

In order to gain one of the 180 Year 7 places at Ilford County High School, your son may need to invest a significant amount of time in his 11+ exam preparation. Take a look at our guide to studying for the 11+ exam and help your son to create an in-depth study plan well ahead of the exam date.

 

The ICHS 11 Plus exam places emphasis on reasoning ability (numerical, verbal and non-verbal), so if your son requires some additional work in this area, we would suggest reading the following articles:

 

 

To give your child the best chance of gaining a place at ICHS, introduce practice exam papers into their revision routine early on, ideally under timed conditions.

 

For Ilford County High School 11 Plus revision, we would specifically recommend that your son works through these resources:

 

 

The information provided about Ilford County High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1904, Highworth Grammar School is a selective, state-funded grammar open to girls aged 11-18, although boys are welcome in the sixth form. In 2011, the school gained academy status and has had Music Specialist Status since 2005.

 

With approximately 1300 pupils, the school teaches a traditional curriculum with an innovative streak. According to the school itself, they are ‘constantly looking to find ways of improving what [they] do’.

 

For an insight into academic life at Highworth Grammar School, watch this short promotional video, filmed by students:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Highworth Grammar School

 

 

Address: Highworth Grammar School, Quantock Drive, Ashford TN24 8UD

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@highworth.kent.sch.uk, 01233 624910

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,241 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 184

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

All 184 Year 7 places at Highworth Grammar School are allocated on the basis of student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test, created by GL Assessment. All admissions are dealt with by the Local Authority (LA) and when parents are applying, they must apply directly to Kent County Council.

 

In cases where there are more suitable candidates than Year 7 places, Highworth Grammar School uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care.
  • Children who already have a sibling at the school at time of entry.
  • Children who have health or special access reasons.
  • Children who live closer to the school, at a permanent address.

 

Should a student not receive a Year 7 place at Highworth Grammar School, parents can appeal the decision. Our guide to grammar school appeals explains the process in detail for parents or guardians.

 

More information about Highworth Grammar School’s admission criteria is available on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Highworth Grammar School

 

 

All applications for 11+ entry to Highworth Grammar School must go through the Local Authority, Kent County Council. Parents must complete the LA’s Secondary Common Application Form (SCAF), which can be done online. It is the LA that coordinates all Year 7 places, not the school, so parents are advised to contact the LA directly with any specific registration questions.

 

 

Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Highworth Grammar School, girls must reach the required standard in the Kent 11 Plus test. This test is standard across the county of Kent and most selective grammar schools in the area adhere to it.

 

The Kent 11+ exam is split into three sections:

 

  • Section 1 focuses on English and maths. Each subject is assessed with of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test. The paper is multiple-choice and an hour long overall.
  • Section 2 tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning. The test is multiple-choice and an hour long in total.
  • Section 3 is a writing task that lasts for 40 minutes. This is not marked as part of the overall 11+ score, but is considered when looking at borderline cases, or during an appeal process.

 

To get a better idea of what to expect from the Kent 11+ test, including a sample question, take a look at this article for parents.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

If your daughter is due to sit the Highworth Grammar School 11 Plus, she will require a supportive and structured study environment. Whatever her attainment levels, your daughter is likely to benefit from regular revision, covering the key subjects she’ll be tested on in the exam itself.

 

The Kent Test’s English section requires good comprehension skills, so encourage your child to read freely and then discuss their understanding of what they have read. Start with this reading list for 11 Plus level.

 

Our online practice papers will give your daughter the best possible chance of success in the Kent 11 Plus exam, with a view to gaining a Year 7 place at Highworth. The two resources below have been specifically designed for the Kent Test, and we would highly recommend including them in your daughter’s study plan. They replicate the format and style of the actual Kent Test covering all subjects, including Spatial Reasoning:

 

 

As the exam date draws closer, give your daughter additional papers to sit under timed conditions to help her better manage time pressure in the actual exam. The resources below will help as they all contain timed tests with questions like those that will appear in the Kent Test:

 

 

The information provided about Highworth Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1904, Highsted Grammar School admits girls aged 11-18. Previously known as Sittingbourne High School for Girls until the 1950s, over 800 pupils currently attend this state-funded, selective grammar school in Kent.

 

In 2011, the school was converted into an academy and has gained recognition as a Specialist Science School. With an ‘Outstanding’ assessment from Ofsted, Highsted Grammar School prides itself on providing a traditional curriculum for its girls, while preparing them for the modern world.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Highsted Grammar School

 

 

Address: Highsted Grammar School, Highsted Road, Sittingbourne ME10 4PT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: admin@highsted.kent.sch.uk, 01795 424223

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 853 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL) / Highsted Test (optional)

 

 

Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Highsted Grammar School, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. Since 2016, prospective pupils also have the option of taking the Highsted Test, set by the school itself. Both tests aim to assess whether a grammar school education is a suitable option for your child.

 

With 120 Year 7 places available at Highsted, should applications exceed this number, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care.
  • Children with a sibling at the school at the time of entry.
  • Children who, for health reasons, require them to attend a particular school.
  • Children who live closest to the school.

 

The parents of students who are not awarded a grammar school place at Highsted can appeal the decision in front of an Independent Appeals Panel.

 

Parents are also advised to check Highsted’s admission process directly via the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Highsted Grammar School

 

 

As Highsted Grammar School uses the Kent Test as a means of selection, parents must register online with Kent Local Authority (LA). Parents also have the option of registering their daughter for the Highsted Test, which is an additional test, but entirely optional. If you would like your daughter to sit the optional test, download and complete this registration form. The Highsted test has equal status for a place in Year 7 as a pass in the Kent Test.

 

Parents will receive results via post in mid-October and can also access the result via the LA’s website.

 

 

Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The majority of Kent-based selective schools require pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam and Highsted Grammar School is no exception. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests.

 

Test 1: This is an hour-long exam, split into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

Test 2: This is a 60-minute test, focusing on reasoning, which is split into three sections:

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task, which might be referred to during borderline or appeal cases.

 

The Highsted Test also consists of two papers, that cover:

 

  1. Verbal ability, numeracy and non-verbal reasoning
  2. English – focusing on reading and writing skills

 

 

How to Prepare for the Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Ensure that your daughter is confident going into the Highsted Grammar School 11 Plus exam by starting revision early. Your child is likely to learn better if revision periods are split into manageable chunks, rather than lengthy, irregular sessions. Ensure that she is familiar with the layout of the exam and the types of questions she may be asked by referring to our practice exam paper resources. If you start this type of practice early enough, you will have a greater understanding of the areas that need more work.

 

To help your daughter gain a Year 7 place at Highsted Grammar School, we have created two practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your daughter needs to work on a particular subject, or simply needs more practice, why not try some of the practice exam paper packs below under timed conditions?

 

 

The information provided about Highsted Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Gravesend Grammar School is a selective grammar school for boys aged 11-18. Girls are accepted into the sixth form from 16+. Based in Kent, Gravesend Grammar School was founded in 1893 and in 2011 became an academy. The school gained status as a maths and computing specialist school in 2004 and then, in 2008, also achieved specialist status as a language school.

 

Gravesend Grammar educates over 1,200 pupils, who experience a traditional academic curriculum and strong pastoral care from staff.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Gravesend Grammar School

 

 

Address: Gravesend Grammar School, Church Walk, Gravesend DA12 2PR

County: Kent

Admissions Info: cooki@gravesendgrammar.eu, 01474 331893

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,213 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL)

 

 

Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 admission to Gravesend Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. Students currently in Year 5 at primary school are encouraged to attend Gravesend’s information evening in June of the summer term. This allows children to learn more about life at the grammar school and parents can ask questions about the admission process. The school provides a parents’ handbook for further information.

 

There is a total of 150 Year 7 places at the school. Should the number of boys who reach the required standard exceed the number of places available, the school uses the following criteria to allocate places:

 

  • Boys in Local Authority Care.
  • Boys with mental or physical impairments.
  • Boys with a sibling at the school.
  • Boys with a parent working at the school.

 

The school will also give priority to boys living within its catchment area.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Gravesend Grammar School

 

 

In the first instance, parents must register their child to sit the Kent Test; this can be done online via Kent County Council. Once the child has sat the test in September, parents will receive the results in October and must then submit their Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF), again via the Kent Local Authority website.

 

 

Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Gravesend Grammar School follows the Kent 11 Plus exam format, which is made up of: Reasoning, Maths and English, plus a writing task.

 

Your child can expect the following exam format:

 

  • Section 1:  This is an hour-long multiple-choice exam that aims to test students’ reasoning abilities. It is broken down into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  • Section 2: This is an hour-long multiple-choice exam that tests English and Maths.
  • Section 3: This is a 40-minute writing task. While not marked as part of the overall 11 Plus score, it can be used as evidence for both borderline cases and in appeals for a grammar school place.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Gravesend Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

The county of Kent is both the largest and most competitive grammar school area in the UK, so it’s imperative that your son prepares well for the Kent Test if you are aiming for Gravesend Year 7 entry.

 

Maximise the time your child has to revise by starting the process early and, in the lead-up to the exam, give them the best resources available. By being organised and sticking to a clear revision strategy, your son will find the Kent Test much easier to tackle.

 

Consider adding practice exam papers into your child’s revision routine ahead of the 11 Plus, as these can help you to monitor their progress and enable them to feel more comfortable with the whole process.
The following practice resources have been specifically designed for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your child needs additional practice in a particular subject area, we would recommend the following practice packs:

 

 

 

If you are concerned that you’ve left your son’s 11 Plus revision a little late, don’t worry; we have put together some actionable last minute tips on how to prepare for the exam.

 

The information provided about Gravesend Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1911, the Henrietta Barnett School (HBS) is a grammar school for girls aged 11 – 18. Located in the quiet surroundings of Hampstead Garden Suburb, the school became an academy in 2012.

 

HBS is known as one of the best academic state schools in the UK and consistently receives ‘outstanding’ Ofsted ratings. The school specialises in Music and English and, prior to becoming an academy, it was a Specialist Music College with English.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Henrietta Barnett School

 

 

Address: Henrietta Barnett School, Central Square, Hampstead Garden Suburb, London NW11 7BN

County: Hertfordshire/London Borough of Barnet

Admissions Info: admissions@hbschool.org.uk, 020 8458 8999

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 745 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 95 (approximately)

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September (Round One) and October (Round Two)

Exam Board Type: Part 1: CEM (University of Durham), Part 2 is written and set by the school

 

 

The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to The Henrietta Barnett School for Year 7 is by academic selection, following an 11 Plus exam. With over 2,000 applications and less than 100 Year 7 places available, the school strongly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open days, which take place in July, to ensure HBS is the right learning environment for the student.

 

In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in looked after care, or those who have previously been in looked after care.
  • Children eligible for Pupil Premium funding (up to 20 candidates only).
  • All remaining candidates in rank score order from 11 Plus exam(s).

 

For more information on The Henrietta Barnett School’s admission criteria, please visit the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Henrietta Barnett School

 

 

HBS follows the admissions process operated by the London Borough of Barnet. For your daughter to be considered for a Year 7 place, you must complete both the Common Application Form (CAF) via Barnet Local Authority and The Henrietta Barnett School Entrance Test Entry Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration is open.

 

It is important that parents apply to both the school and the Local Authority to be considered for a Year 7 place at HBS. If parents do not complete the school’s entry form on time, their daughter will not be able to take the entrance exam.

 

 

The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Henrietta Barnett School 11+ test consists of two rounds, divided as follows:

 

 

Following Round One, results from both sections will be combined and placed in rank order. The top 300 students will be invited back to sit the second exam (below).

 

  • Round Two: English and Mathematics. The English section will test a student’s comprehension and creative writing skills, while the maths section focuses on problem solving skills.

 

The results of both tests will be used to determine the final rankings and place allocations for Year 7.

 

 

How to Prepare for The Henrietta Barnett School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

As one of the top girls’ schools in Britain, it’s no surprise that competition for Year 7 places at The Henrietta Barnett School is intense. However, by creating a good 11 Plus study plan, your child should be able to approach the exam confidently.

 

HBS is very clear about what students should expect from the entrance exam, so ensure that your daughter works on her Verbal Reasoning skills and make sure you read our 11 Plus guide to maths before creating a revision schedule. Practice exam papers are a great way to get your daughter used to the style of questions in the HBS 11 Plus exam and these papers can also help your child to work on their time-keeping ahead of the big day.

 

To begin with, why not try the resources outlined below?

 

11 Plus Maths: Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1  

11 Plus Maths: Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Maths: Multiplce Choice Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus  Comprehension (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Cloze (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Spelling

 

For Round 2 of the Henrietta Barnet 11 plus exam, the following packs will prove useful:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

 

The information provided about Henrietta Barnett School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Founded in 1898, Heckmondwike Grammar School (HGS) is a co-educational grammar school and sixth form based in West Yorkshire that teaches children aged 11 – 18. A Technology College, HGS gained academy status in 2010 and has since specialised as a Language College. Over 1,300 pupils are split across four houses: Brontë, Clarke, Houldsworth and Priestley, and compete in inter-house competitions.

 

A high-performing academic school, HGS not only consistently appears in the top 100 state schools in Britain, it also prides itself on offering an array of extracurricular activities for pupils, including drama, arts and music.

 

For an insight into academic life at Heckmondwike Grammar School watch this short video that showcases the music department:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Heckmondwike Grammar School

 

 

Address: Heckmondwike Grammar School, High Street, Heckmondwike WF16 0AH

County: Yorkshire (Kirklees)

Admissions Info: info@heckgrammar.co.uk, 01924 402202

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,324 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

 

Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Year 7 admission to Heckmondwike Grammar School is managed by the local authority, Kirklees Council. There are 180 places available in Year 7 and parents are encouraged to visit HGS ahead of registration. This allows both parents and children to learn more about the admission process and to ensure a grammar school education is suitable for the child.

 

Parents must include HGS as one of their school choices via the local authority’s common application system, which can be completed online. Usually, HGS is over-subscribed for places in Year 7 and uses the following criteria to determine priority:

 

  • Children who are in, or have previously been in, public care.
  • Children within the school’s catchment area.
  • Children with siblings already at the school.
  • Children who have a parent employed at the school at time of application and entry.

 

More information about the HGS’ admission criteria can be found on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Heckmondwike Grammar School

 

 

Year 7 admission to Heckmondwike Grammar School is based on the results of an 11 Plus exam entrance test. To enter for this exam, parents must register their child before the closing date via the Local Authority website. Parents must also complete a Supplementary Information Form via the school’s website.

 

Children of parents who miss the registration deadline will be considered as late applicants and those applications will only be considered once the initial round of allocations has been completed.

 

 

Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

In 2014, Heckmondwike Grammar School adopted the CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) exam by University of Durham. This test consists of two papers covering:

 

 

Each paper contains a mix of multiple-choice and standard format questions and the papers tend to present pupils with a mix of questions one after the other. Typically, students can expect a short maths section, and a longer problem-solving exercise, followed by plenty of vocabulary assessments in various formats as well as some comprehension. Children must manage their time well in order to complete the tests.

 

Test results are fully standardised and age weighted, to ensure fairness for all those sitting the exams. Parents will receive the 11 Plus test results in mid-October and the Local Authority will distribute formal offers in early March.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To succeed in the 11 Plus exam, children need to be focused and invest time in their revision. Begin with our guide to studying for the 11+ exam and create a thorough study plan well ahead of the exam date.

 

The Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus exam focuses heavily on reasoning ability, so we would recommend reading the following articles on the relevant subjects:

 

 

The school is open to 180 new Year 7 students, but has reported receiving in excess of 800 registrations each year, so competition is very strong. To give your child the best chance of gaining a place at HGS, make sure they are taking practice exam papers under timed conditions. To complete the CEM 11 Plus test, pupils must answer questions quickly. In the final few weeks before the real exams, your child should sit practice papers under timed conditions until they can finish all the questions in the test papers within the allocated time.

 

For Heckmondwike Grammar School 11 Plus revision, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Heckmondwike Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Handsworth Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Handsworth Grammar School (HGS) was founded in 1862 and today is a selective grammar school for boys aged 11-18. Located in Handsworth, just outside of Birmingham city centre, HGS is the oldest surviving selective school in the area.

 

Since 1997, girls have been permitted to attend the school’s sixth form and in total, the school teaches over 900 pupils. The school puts significant emphasis on teaching a well-rounded curriculum, one that accounts for pupils’ cultural and academic development. In Year 7, for example, pupils are required to complete ‘The Opening Minds Project’, covering subjects such as Citizenship.

 

For an insight into academic life at Handsworth Grammar School, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Handsworth Grammar School

 

 

Address: Handsworth Grammar School, Grove Lane, Handsworth, Birmingham B21 9ET

County: West Midlands

Admissions Info: 0121 554 2794

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 936 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: June / September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

 

Handsworth Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

In Birmingham, all eight grammar schools follow the admission criteria of ‘The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium’. Only pupils who reach the required standard via an entrance exam will be considered for entry to Handsworth Grammar School.

 

The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. To be eligible for admission, pupils must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam. Parents should note however, that attainment of the qualifying score doesn’t necessarily guarantee students a place at Handsworth.

 

Applicants are ranked according to their test score and if test scores are equal, priority is given to:

 

  • Looked after children and previously looked after children.
  • Children who live closest to the school.

 

More information about the admission policy at Handsworth Grammar School can be found on the school’s website.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Handsworth Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Handsworth Grammar School, parents need to register their child by completing an online application form. Additionally, parents must complete a Local Authority Preference form. In order to complete the full application, parents must also provide a recent passport sized-photograph of their child, which can be emailed alongside the required forms.

 

Parents will receive their son’s 11 Plus test results in October, although place allocations will not be known until the following March.

 

 

Handsworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Handsworth Grammar School exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes, with additional time for instructions. The papers are split into individually-timed sections that cover:

 

 

Most of the questions across the two papers are multiple-choice and children will be required to answer on a separate sheet.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Handsworth Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Many children are at first anxious about sitting the 11 Plus exam, but with thorough and regular revision, you can ensure that your child takes exam day in their stride.

 

Practice exam papers are an invaluable part of your son’s Handsworth Grammar School 11+ preparation. Doing these papers under timed conditions are a long-standing, proven method of effective revision. Not only do they give your child a clearer idea of the structure of the exam, they are also shown to improve a child’s time management – something that’s vital with the relatively quick-paced CEM 11 Plus exam.

 

We have a bundle of specific 11 Plus practice papers that can help your child prepare effectively for the Handsworth Grammar School exam. We would recommend:

 

 

The information provided about Handsworth Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Fort Pitt Grammar School website

Fort Pitt Grammar School is a selective girls’ grammar, with over 900 pupils aged between 11 and 18. Located in Chatham, one of the Medway towns in Kent, Fort Pitt gained academy status in 2010 and, since 2012, has worked with two other local schools as part of the Fort Pitt Grammar School Academy Trust. After merging the Trust with The Thomas Aveling School to form FPTA Academies, Fort Pitt was designated both a ‘Leading Edge’ school and a National Support School.

 

Pupils from all four houses compete in a number of events throughout the school year, including sports days, inter-house quizzes and academic events.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Fort Pitt Grammar School

 

 

Address: Fort Pitt Grammar School, Fort Pitt Hill, Chatham ME4 6TJ

County: Kent – Medway

Admissions Info: office@fortpitt.medway.sch.uk, 01634 842359

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 900 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)

 

 

Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

In Year 7, there are 120 places available at Fort Pitt determined by students’ performance in an entrance exam. Ahead of submitting an application, the school encourages parents to visit one of its open events. Schools within the Medway local authority use different allocation criteria for Year 7 places, so parents are advised to confirm Fort Pitt’s exact admission criteria directly with the school before completing the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

The Medway Test is only used by Medway grammar schools and children who attend a primary school in the area will take the 11 Plus exam at their current school. Those living outside of the area will take the exam in an independent test centre. Schools in Medway send parents their child’s 11+ result before having to choose which schools to apply for, which aims to ensure you make the best decision for your child.

 

More information on the Fort Pitt Grammar School exam can be accessed on the Medway local authority website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Fort Pitt Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Fort Pitt Grammar School, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority. All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about the registration process.

 

In the case of oversubscription for places, the school uses criteria outlined here to determine which students are given priority.

 

 

Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple-choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and also lasts 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

Previously in The Medway Test, the 11 Plus Maths and writing sections have been double-weighted in comparison to the Verbal Reasoning. That means the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the Verbal Reasoning score in the Medway 11+.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Fort Pitt Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

To be considered for a place at Fort Pitt Grammar School, your daughter must sit the Medway Test at 11 Plus. To maximise your child’s chance of success, it’s important keep stress levels low. When to start 11 Plus preparation is up to parents, but at Exam Papers Plus, we would recommend starting early rather than having to cram for the 11+ at the last minute. A steady approach to exam revision means your daughter is more likely to approach the Fort Pitt exam calmly and confidently.

 

The Medway Test doesn’t allow much time for pondering on answers, so ahead of the exam itself, encourage your daughter to do some 11 Plus practice papers, particularly under timed conditions, to get her used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For the Fort Pitt Grammar School 11+ exam, we would recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Maths (CEM)

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ English Spelling

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Fort Pitt Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Ermysted’s Grammar School website

Founded in 1492, Ermysted’s Grammar School is located in the market town of Skipton in North Yorkshire. A selective school with over 800 boys in attendance, Ermysted’s is funded by its local education authority. The seventh oldest school in Great Britain, the school has consistently reported excellent examination results and in 2006 was noted as the best school in Yorkshire, and amongst the top 25 nationally.

 

Pupils are split into four houses: Ermysted, Hartley, Petyt and Toller, all named after notable figures in the school’s history. Throughout the school year, the houses participate in a variety of competitions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Ermysted’s Grammar School

 

 

Address: Ermysted Grammar School, Gargrave Road, Skipton BD23 1PL

County: North Yorkshire

Admissions Info: admin@ermysteds.n-yorks.sch.uk, 01756 792186

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 815 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Ermysted’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Ermysted’s Grammar School is maintained by the North Yorkshire Education Authority, which coordinates all of the School’s admissions via its selection scheme. There are 120 places available at Year 7 and priority is given to those who live within the school’s catchment area. To be considered for a place at the school, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus test coordinated by GL Assessment.

 

The school will offer places to the highest scoring 28% of pupils who live within the catchment area. In the event of any surplus places, these will be offered to pupils outside of the catchment.

 

In recent years, there has been five Year 7 applications for every one place, so in the event of oversubscription, the school will adhere to the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  • Boys who are currently, or have previously been, looked after by the Local Authority.
  • Boys who live within the catchment area.
  • Boys who live outside of the catchment area.

 

Get more details about Ermysted’s Year 7 admission criteria.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ermysted’s Grammar School

 

 

Boys living within Ermysted’s Grammar School’s catchment area will be automatically entered into the Local Authority’s selection scheme (unless parents choose to withdraw their child from the process). Those living outside of the catchment can apply online via the Local Authority’s website. Parents should be aware that testing may not be possible for pupils who registered after the closing date until after the date of allocation of school places.

 

Parents will receive details of their child’s results in October and place allocations will be distributed in March the following year.

 

 

Ermysted’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus test for Ermysted’s Grammar School consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is divided into four sections, with 10 minutes allocated to each one. Once a section has been completed by pupils, they cannot go back to that section.

 

How to Prepare for the Ermysted’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

With its strong reputation for an excellent all-round education, Ermysted’s Grammar School attracts applicants from over 50 primary schools in its local area and beyond. With this in mind, parents should be prepared to start their child’s 11 Plus revision well ahead of the actual exam.

 

North Yorkshire’s Local Authority 11 Plus tests focus on reasoning, so we would recommend reading the following articles ahead of your child’s revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

Practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing your child’s confidence for the Ermysted’s Grammar School’s 11+, as they can help familiarise them with the test requirements and better understand the types of reasoning questions they may be asked.

 

As test day gets closer, consider doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child to prepare for Ermysted’s exam; we would recommend the following:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about Ermysted’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus website

Initially founded in 1904 as Dover County School, Dover Grammar School for Girls was established in 1910. The school educates over 700 pupils, primarily girls aged 11 to 18, although the school’s Sixth Form does admit boys from ages 16 to 18.

 

Since 1910, pupils have been split into four houses: Hubert de Burgh, St Martin, Queen Ethelburga, and Stephen de Pencester. The school prides itself on offering a broad range of extracurricular activities, including art, sports and drama clubs.

 

For a brief insight into academic life at Dover Grammar School for Girls, watch this promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dover Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Address: Dover Grammar School for Girls, Frith Road, Dover CT16 2PZ

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@dggs.kent.sch.uk, 01304 206 625

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 789 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test or the Dover Test

 

Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Prospective pupils have the choice of sitting either the Dover Test or the Kent Test at 11 Plus. Students must take at least one of these tests in order to be considered for a Year 7 place, although many opt to take both. Before registering your daughter, it is advised that both parents and students visit the school on one of its open events in June. At these events, school staff will answer any questions you may have regarding the school’s admissions process.

 

In recent years, the ratio of applicants to Year 7 places at Dover Grammar School for Girls has been 3:1. When the number of applicants exceeds the spaces available, places will be allocated in the following order of priority:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care, or previously in Local Authority Care
  • Children with a sibling already attending the school
  • Medical, health, social and special access reasons
  • Children in receipt of Pupil Premium
  • Nearness of children’s homes to school

 

Find out more about the school’s Year 7 admissions process.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dover Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Parents of students who wish to register their daughter to sit the entrance tests must register with the school before the exam date. To register for the Kent Test, you must complete an online registration form. Application forms to sit the Dover Test can be found on the school’s website. Please note: for the Dover Test, the school will not accept any late applications.

 

Once your daughter has sat the Kent Test at 11+, parents must complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to Kent County Council. This process can usually be done online.

 

If you have any further queries about Dover Grammar School for Girls’ admissions process at Year 7, call the school on 01304 206 625 or email enquiries@dggs.kent.sch.uk.

 

Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Dover Grammar School for Girls uses both the Kent 11 Plus exam and the Dover Test.

 

The Kent Exam consists of Reasoning, English and Maths, as well as a writing task. The exam takes the following format:

 

  1. An hour-long, multiple-choice exam that tests a pupil’s reasoning abilities. Girls will be tested on Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning.
  2. An hour-long, multiple-choice exam that tests English and Maths. Each question will have 5 answer choices and your child will need to mark their responses on a separate answer sheet.
  3. A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. This task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline or appeal cases.

 

Would you like to learn more about the Kent Test? This article explains everything you need to know.

 

The Dover Test covers Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning and also tests at the Key Stage 2 National Curriculum Maths and English level.

 

How to Prepare for the Dover Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Kent is the largest and most competitive grammar school area in England, with 35 selective schools. Therefore, it’s important that both you and your child understand the 11 Plus process. It is vital to maximise the time and resources available to your child in the lead-up to the test. With a strong revision strategy, your child will be better placed to tackle both the Kent and Dover tests.

 

If you’re unsure of your child’s current ability, practice exam papers are a good way of establishing their strengths and weaknesses. It’s vital to introduce this type of practice into your child’s 11 Plus study routine and it allows you to closely monitor their progress.

 

Pupils sitting The Kent Test, with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at Dover Grammar School for Girls, will benefit from these resources:

 

 

These practice tests cover every aspect of the exam including Mathematics, English and Reasoning, making them ideal for your daughter.

 

Additional revision for specific subjects can be found in the following practice exam papers:

 

 

 

The information provided about Dover Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Dover Grammar School for Boys website

A selective secondary school, Dover Grammar School for Boys was founded in 1905 and educates over 700 boys aged 11 to 18, although it does accept girls into its sixth form. In 2010, the school achieved an ‘Outstanding’ rating by Ofsted and has been awarded an International Schools Award due to its close links with other schools around the world.

 

A community-minded school, Dover Grammar School for Boys is also home to a successful Combined Cadet Force, which is open to pupils from Year 8 upwards from the surrounding area of Kent.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dover Grammar School for Boys

 

 

Address: Dover Grammar School for Boys, Astor Avenue, Dover CT17 0DQ

County: Kent

Admissions Info: office@dgsg.co.uk, 01304 206117

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 758 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test (GL) or Dover Grammar School Test

 

 

Dover Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Dover Grammar School for Boys in Year 7 is based on pupil performance in the Kent Test, or the school’s own entrance test. Before parents commit to registering their son, the school recommends attending one of its open events. This will give you a better idea as to whether or not your son would be suited to a grammar school education.

 

Dover Grammar School for Boys has a maximum of 120 places allocated in Year 7. In case of oversubscription, the school gives priority to:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care
  • Children with a sibling already attending the school at the time of entry
  • Medical, health and special access reasons
  • Children who live close to the school (and can prove it is their permanent home)

 

Visit the school’s website for more information about its admissions process in Year 7.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dover Grammar School for Boys

 

 

In the first instance, parents should complete and submit separate registration forms for the Kent Test and/or the Dover Boys Test. Your son’s current primary school can help you register for the Kent Test, or you can refer to Kent County Council’s website.

 

For the Dover Boys Test, an application form can be found via the school’s website. Once your son has taken the entrance exam, an application needs to be made through your local authority’s application system (a Secondary Common Application Form). In most cases, applications can be made online through your local authority’s website.

 

More details about the registration process are available by emailing the school at office@dgsg.co.uk or calling the main office on 01304 206117.

 

 

Dover Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Kent has its own 11 Plus exam, the Kent Test, which is used to allocate Year 7 places. Dover Grammar School for Boys also has the Dover Test. It is not necessary for pupils to take both exams.

 

The Kent Test’s format is as follows:

 

  1. Reasoning: A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities, split into multiple sections. These sections covers Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  2. English and Maths: A one-hour exam, split into two sections. The English section tests comprehension and literacy skills, while the multiple-choice maths section covers a range of topics, including arithmetic.
  3. Writing: This 40-minute task is not marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but can be referred to during an appeal case.

 

The Dover Test covers similar topics, including Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning and also tests at Key Stage 2 National Curriculum maths and English level.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Dover Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Even though your son can take two different tests to try and gain a place at Dover Grammar School for Boys, that needn’t mean twice the stress. In fact, creating a stress-free environment for him in the run-up to his exam is important – and achievable. It’s important to keep motivation levels high, so use revision time as an opportunity to play learning games with your child. Make sure your son is working on topics that he struggles with rather than repeating ones he already knows; this is a more efficient use of time.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we’re experts in exam preparation. We have devised online practice papers specific to the Kent 11 Plus Test. These tests have been created by assessment experts and fully replicate the actual exam format and structure. To gain one of the 120 Year 7 places at Dover Grammar School for Boys, your son must show skill in several areas. These tests will allow him to build his confidence and improve his overall performance as the exam date draws closer.

 

If your son is taking the Kent 11 Plus Test, we would fully recommend the following practice papers to begin with:

 

 

If your child requires further practice in a particular subject area ahead of the exam, you can choose also from the following:

 

The information provided about Dover Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Devonport High School for Girls website

Located in Plymouth, Devonport High School for Girls (DHSG) teaches over 800 girls aged 11 to 18. A selective girls’ state grammar school, it gained academy status in 2011. Due to funding received through its Specialist Language College status in 2005, DHSG updated its facilities to include first-rate computer rooms, language laboratories and a contemporary library.

 

Pupils consistently produce excellent exam results and the school is noted for the significant progress students make through to GCSE level.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Devonport High School for Girls

 

 

Address: Devonport High School for Girls, Lyndhurst Road, Peverell, Plymouth PL2 3DL

County: Devon

Admissions Info: secondary.admissions@plymouth.gov.uk, 01752 307469

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 810 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Devonport High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Application for admission to Devonport High School for Girls is made through Plymouth City Council and all prospective Year 7 pupils must take the 11 Plus exam in September before the year of entry. Each of the 120 places available at DHSG are dealt with by the local authority and parents must apply for a school place via the Council’s website.

 

You can find more details about DHSG’s admissions process via the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Devonport High School for Girls

 

 

To gain a Year 7 place at DHSG, all prospective pupils must take the 11 Plus exam. You can register your daughter via this online registration form.

 

Girls will sit the 11 Plus tests in September and parents will receive results in mid-October. Places will be allocated in early March and parents must respond to this allocation within two weeks. It is expected that all grammar school places for DHSG will be filled within one allocation round; late applications won’t be included in the first round of allocations.

 

Devonport High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam at Devonport High School is split into three papers:

 

  1. Multiple-choice English
  2. Written English
  3. Multiple-choice maths

 

While results from both multiple-choice GL Assessment papers are marked, the written English comprehension test set by the school does not count toward a pupil’s final assessed mark and tends to be considered in appeal cases only.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Devonport High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

With its consistently strong exam results and first class pastoral care for pupils, Devonport High School for Girls is considered one of the best selective schools in Devon. This means competition Year 7 entry is high and your daughter will have to perform well in all 11 Plus exams to be in with a chance of securing a place.

 

The key to effectice 11 Plus exam preparation is regular revision and testing, little and often. Once you have established a revision routine with your child, gradually introduce them to questions similar to those that they may be asked in the exams. Practice exam papers can go a long way in improving a child’s performance at 11 Plus level, as they will already be comfortable with the structure ahead of the exam itself.

 

To give your child the best opportunity of securing a Year 7 place at Devonport High School for Girls, we can recommend the following 11+ practice tests, which have been specifically designed with the Devonport 11 plus exam in mind:

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ English Spelling Pack

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL)

 

The information provided about Devonport High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Devonport High School for Boys website

Devonport High School for Boys (DHSB) is located in Plymouth and is a boys’ grammar that educates approximately 1,135 pupils. Founded in 1896, the school admits pupils aged between 11 and 18. In 2002, it was one of just four schools in England to be designated as a specialist engineering college. In 2007, Devonport was awarded High Performing Secondary Schools status for its language specialisms and Applied Learning. The school became an academy in 2011. Pupils are split between six houses: Campbell, Edison, Newton, Priestley, Smeaton and Winstanley.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Devonport High School for Boys

 

 

Address: Devonport High School for Boys, Paradise Road, Stoke, Plymouth PL1 5QP

County: Devon

Admissions Info: sarah.nicholson@dhsb.org, 01752 208787

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,135 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Devonport High School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Devonport High School for Boys currently admits 180 pupils in Year 7. Admission to the school at this stage is determined by each pupil’s performance in the 11 Plus exam. Due to a wide catchment area that extends well beyond Plymouth, the school is very popular for Year 7 applications and so parents are advised to attend one of the school’s open days. At the event, you’ll have the opportunity to hear from the school’s headteacher and learn more about the admissions process.

 

Should the school be oversubscribed for Year 7 places, it uses the following criteria in order of priority:

 

  1. Pupils who are, or have previously been, in looked-after care.
  2. Pupils in receipt of the pupil or service premium at the date of testing
  3. Children of a member of staff who has been employed at the school for two or more years or children whose parents work at the school.
  4. The student’s mark in the English paper.
  5. Distance from the school, with those living closer to DHSB given priority.

 

Get more information about Devonport High School for Boys’ Year 7 admissions process.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Devonport High School for Boys

 

 

Parents who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests need to register with the school before the September exam dates. In the first instance, parents need to complete this online registration form.

 

Prospective DHSB pupils will sit the entrance exams over two dates in September and parents will receive results in mid-October. The results of the examination don’t confirm that a place will be offered; offer letters will be issued in March the following year and only then will you know if your child has been successful in gaining a place at DHSB.

 

Devonport High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Devonport High School for Boys’ 11 Plus exam consists of three tests:

 

  • English
  • Mathematics
  • Creative writing paper, set by the school

 

The English and maths papers are both multiple choice, while the 40-minute Creative writing paper requires pupils to plan and write a piece of descriptive text. Pupils will be marked on sentence structure, punctuation, composition, spelling and vocabulary.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Devonport High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Preparation for the Devonport High School for Boys’ 11 Plus exams needn’t be stressful. All you need is good organisation and the right resources. If you’re feeling overwhelmed by the amount of 11 Plus advice online, then have a read our 11 Plus guide for parents – it’s a great place to start!

 

As DHSB’s 11 Plus exams focus on maths and English, we would also recommend taking a look at these articles:

 

Use the run-up to the exams as an opportunity to test your child with practice papers. An understanding of the exam layout and structure is vital if your son is going to feel comfortable under exam conditions.

For Devonport High School for Boys’ 11 Plus, we would recommend the following practice resources for your son:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Problem Solving (GL)

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ English Spelling

 

The information provided about Devonport High School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Dartford Grammar School for Girls website

Established in 1904, Dartford Grammar School for Girls admits girls aged 11-18. Previously known as Dartford County, approximately 1,000 students currently attend this Kent-based school.

 

A grant-maintained school, in 2008 Dartford was reaccredited as a science specialist school. It is a high-performing grammar and is one of Dartford’s top performing state schools.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dartford Grammar School for Girls

 

 

Address: Dartford Grammar School for Girls, Shepherds Lane, Dartford DA1 2NT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: school@dartfordgrammargirls.kent.sch.uk, 01322 223123

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,064 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

 

Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Dartford Grammar School for Girls, pupils must sit the Kent 11 Plus Test. The test exists to assess whether grammar school is a suitable option for your child.

 

With 180 Year 7 places available, Dartford Grammar School for Girls is often over-subscribed. In such cases the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

  • Children in Local Authority Care
  • Pupils who are eligible for free school meals
  • Students who already have a sibling at the school
  • Students who live closest to the school (100 places allocated here)

 

The parents of students who are not awarded a Grammar School place can appeal the decision in front of an Independent Appeals Panel.

 

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dartford Grammar School for Girls

 

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to the school, parents need to register their child online with the Kent Local Authority (LA), or request a paper registration form by contacting the Secondary Admissions Team at Kent LA.

 

Test results will be posted out in mid-October and parents can also view the results online. For more information about Dartford Grammar School for Girls’ registration process at the 11 Plus stage, email school@dartfordgrammargirls.kent.sch.uk or call 01322 223123.

 

 

Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Along with the majority of Kent-based selective schools, Dartford Grammar for Girls requires pupils to take the Kent 11 Plus exam, which consists of two multiple-choice tests with a separate answer sheet.

 

The first test is one hour long and is split into two sections, English and Maths. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.

 

The second test is a reasoning paper and is split into three sections:

 

The Verbal Reasoning section is 30 minutes long, including a 10 minute practice section. The Non-Verbal and Spatial Reasoning tests are each around 15 minutes long, including practice sections.

 

Prospective pupils are also required to sit a 40-minute writing task. Although this isn’t marked as part of the 11+ exam, it could be used in appeal cases, borderline cases or at a Headteacher’s request.

 

You can see some sample questions for the Kent 11 Plus Exam here.

 

 

How to Prepare for the Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

The Kent Test varies from year to year, but children are still able to maximise their potential in the exam through good preparation. When to begin preparation will depend on your child’s current attainment, but with a set revision plan, all children will benefit from regular practice sessions.

 

For the Dartford Grammar School for Girls 11+ test, a good place to start is with practice exam papers. This not only gives pupils an idea of the types of questions they can expect in the real exam, but can provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities.

 

Gaining a Year 7 place at a Kent-based school isn’t always easy. We have designed two practice tests specifically for the Kent Test:

 

 

Once your child has completed these, you might notice gaps in their knowledge, or that they aren’t as strong in a particular subject area. If this the case, you can choose the most appropriate subject-specific resource pack to help strengthen their individual subject knowledge:

 

 

The information provided about Dartford Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

reenshot of the Dane Court Grammar School website

Established in 1957 as a Technical High School, Dane Court is a co-educational grammar located in the coastal town of Broadstairs in Kent. Open to 1,200 pupils aged 11 to 18, it received academy status in 2011.

 

Dane Court became a Specialist Language College in 2003 and has since invested a significant amount of resources into promoting languages within its community. Pupils are divided into six houses, with 300 of those sitting within the school’s sixth form.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dane Court Grammar School

 

 

Address: Dane Court Grammar School, Broadstairs Road, Broadstairs, CT10 2RT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: admin@danecourt.kent.sch.uk, 01843 864941

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1202 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 165

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

 

Dane Court Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to Dane Court Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. The school has 165 Year 7 places available, but the school is consistently (and heavily) oversubscribed. In cases where the number of applicants is greater than the spaces available at the school, Dane Court Grammar School uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children who are presently or were previously in Local Authority Care
  • Medical/health and special access reasons
  • Students who already have a sibling at the school
  • Students who live closest to the school

 

The parents of students who are not awarded a place can appeal the decision in front of an Independent Appeals Panel. Specific details of the appeals process are usually sent to parents at the same time as the offer letter.

 

If you would like to appeal a Grammar School decision, take a look at this useful article that explains the process for parents or guardians.

 

More information about Dane Court Grammar School’s admissions criteria is available on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dane Court Grammar School

 

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Dane Court Grammar School, parents must complete a registration form by July prior to the year of entry and a Common Application Form (CAF). More details about Dane Court’s registration process are available by contacting the school directly on 01843 864 941, or by emailing admin@danecourt.kent.sch.uk.

 

Dane Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Pupils wishing to attend Dane Court Grammar School from Year 7 must take and pass the Kent 11 Plus exam. The tests cover English, maths and reasoning and also a writing task. The exam is used to assess whether your child is suitable for entry to the school and the format is used by the majority of the 35 wholly selective and 4 partially selective grammar schools in the Kent region.

 

The Kent 11+ exam format is:

 

  • Section 1: A one hour exam that tests English and maths. Both topics have a 5 minute practice exercise and a 25 minute test
  • Section 2: A one hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning

 

Learn more about the Kent 11+ Test, including sample questions, here.

 

How to Prepare for the Dane Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

Exam revision can be a fraught period for both children and their parents, particularly if preparation is left until the last minute. With only one chance to impress at the 11 Plus stage, Exam Papers Plus offers a complete solution to exam preparation. With our online practice papers, you can give your child the edge over the competition in the Kent 11 Plus exam and maximise their chances of gaining a much-coveted place at Dane Court Grammar School.

 

Starting your child’s revision plan early can ensure that they aren’t overwhelmed with new information as the exam date draws closer. Thorough preparation also means you’re well aware of any weak areas that require additional work in the lead up to the exam.

 

Competition for Year 7 places at Dane Court Grammar School is fierce, so we would recommend taking a look at these resources that have been specifically designed for the Kent Test:

 

 

If your child needs additional practice in a particular subject area, we would recommend the following practice packs:

 

 

The information provided about Dane Court Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Dartford Grammar School website

Dartford Grammar School is a selective school for boys aged 11-18. Located in Kent, the school educates approximately 1200 pupils and admits girls into its sixth form. Founded in 1576, Dartford Grammar is one of the oldest schools in England. Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, in 2011 the school gained academy status and pupils consistently achieve excellent exam results.

 

For a brief insight into academic life at Dartford Grammar School watch this promotional video:

 

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dartford Grammar School

 

Address: Dartford Grammar School, West Hill, Dartford DA1 2HW

County: Kent

Admissions Info: admissions@dartfordgrammarschool.org.uk, 01322 223039

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1203 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

Dartford Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Dartford Grammar School is determined by pupil performance in the Kent 11+ exam. There are currently 180 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open mornings, which take place in June. Staff provide guided tours and the Headmaster will give a short speech to each group.

 

In case of oversubscription, Dartford Grammar School gives priority to:

 

  • Children who are or were in Local Authority Care
  • Students who live closest to the school (90 places allocated)

 

The remaining 90 places are available to all applicants regardless of their address. Visit Dartford Grammar School’s website for more information about its admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Dartford Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Dartford Grammar School, parents must first register their child for the Kent Test and Common Application Form (CAF). More details about the registration process are available by contacting the school on 01322 223039, or by emailing admissions@dartfordgrammarschool.org.uk.

 

Dartford Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Kent is home to 35 wholly selective grammar schools and 4 partially selective schools, the majority of which use the Kent Test at 11 Plus level to allocate Year 7 places. The exam includes tests in Reasoning, English and Maths and also includes a writing task.

 

Take a look at this breakdown of the exam format:

 

Section 1Reasoning: A one-hour exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is broken down into three shorter sections and focuses on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.

 

Section 2 – English and Maths: A one-hour exam that is split into two sections. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and 25 minute test. The English section will test comprehension and literacy skills, while the Maths section will contain multiple choice questions covering a range of topics that pupils will have covered up to Year 6.

 

Section 3 – Writing: This 40-minute writing task will not be marked as part of the 11 Plus exam, but might be used in borderline cases, or by headteachers during the place allocation stage.

 

How to Prepare for the Dartford Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

To give your child the best possible chance of gaining a place at Dartford Grammar School, it’s worth establishing a positive revision plan with them. Regular revision, little and often, will give them a better chance of improving their exam technique, increasing their subject knowledge and learning how to perform well under exam conditions.

 

Show your child that you have a real interest in their academic progress by choosing from our selection of online practice papers. We’d highly recommend the following resources, both of which have been produced specifically with the Kent Test in mind:

 

 

Additionally, if your child requires further practice in a particular subject area ahead of the exam, you can choose from the following selection of papers that are designed to strengthen individual subject knowledge:

 

 

Have you left your Dartford Grammar School 11 Plus exam preparation a little late? Don’t worry, take a look at our post Last Minute Preparation Tips for the 11 Plus Exam.

 

The information provided about Dartford Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Crossley Heath Grammar School website

Crossley Heath Grammar School is a co-educational grammar located in West Yorkshire’s Halifax. The school currently educates over 1100 pupils across years 7 – 13. The school was founded in 1985, when two previous schools joined together – Crossley and Porter School and Heath Grammar School. In 2003, the school became a Specialist Language College and then became an academy in 2013.

 

Pupils are divided into four houses: Kings, Porter, Queens and Savile. Across the academic year, houses compete with each other in a variety of events and competitions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Crossley Heath Grammar School

 

 

Address: Crossley Heath Grammar School Savile Park, Halifax, HX3 0HG

County: Yorkshire

Admissions Info: admin@crossleyheath.org.uk, 01422 360272

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1116 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: Late September or early October

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment for Verbal Reasoning, Maths and English papers are created by the school themselves

 

Crossley Heath Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Crossley Heath Grammar School complies with Calderdale Council’s admissions process in Yorkshire. In order to be considered for a place at the school in Year 7, pupils must pass the 11 Plus exam. Crossley Heath currently admits 180 new Year 7 students per school year.

 

The grammar school encourages prospective pupils and parents to attend its Open Evening, which takes place in June. At the event, school staff will provide additional information about the admissions process and visitors will also have the opportunity to ask questions.

 

Get more information on Crossley Heath Grammar School’s admission criteria.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Crossley Heath Grammar School

 

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Crossley Heath Grammar School, parents must register their child via the school’s online application form. If students meet the required criteria, they can take the school entrance test in September. Parents will receive the results from the admissions test in mid-October. Please note: not all pupils who perform well in the test will be guaranteed a place at the school. If a pupil has been offered a place at Crossley Heath Grammar School, parents must submit the Online Common Application Form (CAF) to Calderdale Local Authority by late October and include the school as one of their five preferences to be considered for a place.

 

Crossley Heath Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

Crossley Heath Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of three tests, covering:

 

  1. English
  2. Mathematics
  3. Verbal Reasoning

 

The English paper lasts an hour and is split into two sections: reading and writing. Unusually for a grammar school exam, the English test contains a mix of multiple-choice and open answer questions. The maths test consists of 40 questions in multiple choice format and lasts for 30 minutes, while the 30-minute verbal reasoning paper consists of 50 multiple choice questions.

 

How to Prepare for the Crossley Heath Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

In order to maximise your child’s chances of success in the 11 Plus exam, both you and your child need to be organised. The more time you put into thorough preparation, the lower your stress levels will be as the exam date approaches. As a starting point, review our 11 Plus guide for parents, which will give you an overview of the exam and what to expect from the process from start to finish.

 

 

Crossley Heath Grammar School tends to be oversubscribed for Year 7 places, so it’s a good idea to start your child early with their revision to ensure they have plenty of time to work on their weaker subject areas. Practice test papers are an ideal way of preparing your child for the 11 Plus exam at Crossley Heath. Not only will the papers help familiarise your child with the layout of the exam, but will help to improve a their time management skills and teach them how to perform to the best of their ability in an exam environment.

 

For the Crossley Heath Grammar School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Crossley Heath Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Colyton Grammar School website

Colyton Grammar School, known locally as ‘CGS’, was founded in 1546. Located in Colyford, in East Devon, the school is co-educational and teaches students aged from 11 to 18. The school has a reputation for producing good exam results and has been classified as ‘Outstanding’ by OFSTED three years running. In 2011, the school became an academy, having previously been maintained by Devon County Council. Colyton Grammar School is also part of the South West Academic Trust, alongside other selective schools across the South West of England. The trust exists to share best practice.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Colyton Grammar, take a look at this video created by the school.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Colyton Grammar School

 

Address: Colyton Grammar School, Whitwell Lane, Colyford, Colyton, EX24 6HN

County: Devon

Admissions Info: admin@colytongrammar.devon.sch.uk, 01297 552327

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 806 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 120

Open Day Dates: April, July and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Colyton Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Entry to Colyton Grammar in Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 Plus exam. Candidates who achieve eligible scores are ranked based on performance, with the top students being shortlisted for entry. Although the admission criteria varies from school to school across Devon, each requires parents to complete a Common Application Form (CAF), where they can express interest in at least three schools. Colyton Grammar must be named on the CAF in order for students to be considered for a place.

 

In cases where there are more eligible applicants than places available, the school uses the following over-subscription criteria to determine priority:

 

  1. Looked After Children or children, who have previously been in looked after care.
  2. Students who are eligible for Pupil Premium.
  3. Children of staff members.
  4. Rank order of the total score in the 11 Plus tests.
  5. Pupil distance from school.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Colyton Grammar School

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to Colyton Grammar School, parents need to register their child online. The registration form can be accessed here. The form is used to double-check that students meet all the necessary admission criteria to attend the Test Day. Late registrations may still be considered under exceptional circumstances, such as illness etc.

 

Colyton Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The entrance exam consists of two papers that last approximately 50 minutes each. Both are multiple choice and split into various timed sections with a break between the two tests.

 

The exam tests:

 

  • Verbal ability (verbal reasoning, vocabulary, comprehension)
  • Non-verbal ability (shapes and objects).
  • Numerical ability (maths and problem solving)

There will also be an additional English paper, which lasts for 20 minutes. The paper normally tests creative writing ability and is marked separately by the school.

 

How to Prepare for the Colyton Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The Colyton Grammar School 11 Plus exam is set by CEM and is multiple choice. Our similarly-styled multiple choice practice papers can really help students get used to the style and format of the actual exam.

 

There are many benefits to preparing for the entrance test with practice test papers, as schools often don’t do preparation in class. Practice papers can help familiarise students with the layout of the 11 Plus exam and get them used to answering the types of questions that may come up on the day. As the exam approaches, doing timed practice papers can also help improve time management skills.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources to prepare for the Colyton Eleven Plus exam:

 

 

The information provided about Colyton Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Churston Ferrers Grammar School website

Churston Ferrers Grammar School (CFGS) is a co-educational grammar school located in Torbay, in South Devon. A selective school, CFGS has academy status and is a Specialist Humanities College. The school consistently performs well in exam league tables and in previous years has been ranked as ‘outstanding’ by OFSTED. In 2016, the school’s Modern Foreign Languages block was remodelled to create a new section for the Art and Music departments. Students are split into year groups and subdivided into houses, which are managed by form tutors.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Churston Ferrers Grammar School

 

Address: Churston Ferrers Grammar School, Greenway Road, Brixham, TQ5 0LN

County: Devon

Admissions Info: secretary@churston.torbay.sch.uk, 01803 842289

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 931 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 130

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Churston Ferrers Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

 

Admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Churston Ferrers Grammar School is part of the South Devon Schools Consortium, so the entrance test is the same one used by all the selective schools in Torbay. Parents need to register their child to take the tests and the school recommends that students sit the exam at Churston Ferrers to help familiarise them with the building and staff.

 

Each year, the school has an Open Day and welcomes students and parents to take a tour of the school and meet the staff and students. The Head Teacher gives a presentation and provides more information about the 11 Plus process. There is also the opportunity to observe lessons to provide students with an insight into what it’s like to study at the school.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Churston Ferrers Grammar School

 

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Churston Ferrers Grammar School, parents need to register their child by completing the school’s application form, which can be found online, here. Additionally, parents need to complete the Common Application Form (CAF) and list CFGS as one of three preferred schools.

 

Once the exam has been taken, parents will receive a guidance letter, which provides an indication of their child’s performance and whether they’d be eligible for entry to a selective school. It should be noted that the letter won’t provide test scores and isn’t a guarantee of a school place as offers won’t be made until later.

 

Churston Ferrers Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Churston Ferrer 11 Plus exam aims to reflect the syllabus being taught at primary school in accordance with the Year 5 National Curriculum. There is only one stage of testing, which means that student test scores will be the principal consideration for admission to the school.

 

There will be two test papers, each lasting approximately 50 minutes. The questions will be in multiple choice format and split into several timed sections. The elements that will be tested are:

 

  • Verbal ability (vocabulary, verbal reasoning, comprehension)
  • Non-Verbal ability (shapes and objects)
  • Numerical abi
  • lity (maths problems)
  • English Writing

 

The English writing test focuses on creative writing and lasts approximately 20 minutes. Students will be given a choice of topics to write on and will be asked to present the subject in a specific way. For example, they may be asked to write persuasively, or to create a fictional story.

How to Prepare for the Churston Ferrers Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Preparing for the 11 Plus requires good organisation. The sooner your child starts revising, the more time they’ll have to improve their knowledge and exam technique. It’s a good idea to create a study timetable with your child to ensure that they cover everything they’ll need to know for the tests.

 

Introducing practice exam papers early can also provide a good indication of their current strengths and weaknesses. Once you know which areas need improving, you can tailor your child’s study schedule to suit.

 

Not only do exam practice papers help familiarise students with the layout of the exam, but they help them get used to the types of questions they may be asked on the day. As the exam approaches, we’d recommend having your child do timed practice papers under exam conditions. This can help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Churston Ferrers Grammar School 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about Churston Ferrers Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Clitheroe Royal Grammar School website

Clitheroe Royal Grammar School was founded in 1554. Located in Clitheroe, in Lancashire, the school is co-educational and was formerly an all-boys school. In 1991, the school became a Grant Maintained School before becoming a Foundation School a few years later in 1998. In recent years, Clitheroe Royal Grammar has converted to Academy status. The school has a student council and also has Language College status.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Clitheroe Royal Grammar School

 

Address: Clitheroe Royal Grammar School, Chatburn Road, Clitheroe, BB7 2BA

County: Lancashire

Admissions Info: mainschool@crgs.org.uk, 01200 423379

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1263 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 120

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Clitheroe Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Clitheroe Royal Grammar School complies with the admission criteria as set out by the Lancashire Co-ordinated Scheme for secondary schools. Entry to the school is determined by student performance in the 11 Plus exam.

 

The grammar school website provides some introductory information about the admission process and encourages prospective students and parents to attend their Open Evening, which takes place in September.

 

More information about admission to the school is provided at the event where students and parents will have the opportunity to meet staff and tour the school grounds.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Clitheroe Royal Grammar School

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to Clitheroe Royal Grammar School, parents need to register their child by completing an online application form, which can be accessed here. If students meet the criteria, they can then take the school entrance test. However, it should be noted that good performance in the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of a place at the school.

 

In cases where there are more suitable candidates than Year 7 places, the school uses its oversubscription criteria to determine priority as follows:

 

  1. Looked after children, or children who have previously been in looked after care
  2. Students who live in the school’s catchment area and meet the required standard
  3. Students who live outside the catchment area and meet the required standard

 

Clitheroe Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Clitheroe Royal Grammar School 11 Plus exam consist of three tests in:

 

  1. Maths
  2. English
  3. Verbal Reasoning

 

The Maths test consists of 50 questions in multiple choice format and lasts for 50 minutes. The Verbal Reasoning test has 80 multiple choice questions in 50 minutes and the English paper has 56 multiple choice questions that last for 45 minutes. There are two sections to the English test – one that tests spelling, punctuation and grammar, and one that requires students to read an extract of text and then answer questions about the passage.

 

How to Prepare for the Clitheroe Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

When it comes to preparing for the 11 Plus exam, it’s best to start early. The more time your child has to improve their knowledge and refine their exam technique, the more prepared they’ll feel leading up to the big day.

 

We recommend creating a study timetable with your child to ensure that they cover all the elements of the exam. It’s also a good idea to introduce practice exam papers early in their revision so you can see where their strengths and weaknesses lie.

 

Not only do practice exam papers help familiarise students with the layout of the exam, but they get them used to the types of questions they’ll likely be asked on the day of the tests. As exam day approaches, we recommend having your child do timed practice papers under test conditions to get them used to answering questions under pressure.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Clitheroe Royal Grammar School 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about Clitheroe Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School website

Founded in 1931as Sidcup County School for Boys, Chislehurst and Sidcup Grammar School (as it’s now known) is a co-educational grammar school for students aged between 11 and 18. Located in Bexley, London, the school has a reputation for producing good exam results. Students are split into one of five houses: Williams, Townshend, Lester, Edlemann and Davies. There is also a Staff house for school employees. The school produces an annual magazine called The Chronicle, which is organised by its pupils.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Chis & Sid, check out this ‘day in the life’ video produced by students of the school:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School

 

Address: Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School, Hurst Road, Sidcup, DA15 9AG

County: Bexley

Admissions Info: enquiries@csgrammar.com, 020 8302 6511

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,330 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 190

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School is part of the Bexley Co-ordinated Secondary School Admissions Scheme and only students who pass the Bexley test can be considered for admission in Year 7.

 

The Bexley test aims to select the top academic students for entrance to the school with pass marks set by a selection panel of headteacher and officers. In order to be eligible for consideration, students need to produce test scores within the top 180 candidates. However, it should be noted that passing the Bexley 11 Plus isn’t a guarantee of a Year 7 place.

 

In cases where there are more eligible candidates than Year 7 places, the school uses its over subscription criteria to determine pupil priority. More information about the school’s over-subscription and admissions policies can be found here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar, parents need to complete the school’s admission pack, which can be downloaded from the school website here, alongside information booklets about the school and its open day.

 

Every child that attends a primary school in Bexley will be invited to sit the 11 Plus exam in September. The tests will either take place at the pupil’s primary school, or at an independent testing centre

 

In order to confirm registration, parents need to send all relevant documentation to the school office. More information on what documents are needed can be found in the admission pack.

 

Completed packs should be returned by post to:

 

Mrs N Sayell

Office Manager (Admissions)

Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School

Hurst Road

Sidcup

Kent

DA15 9AG

 

Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two test papers that last around 50 minutes each. The two tests cover the following elements:

 

  • Verbal ability
  • Numerical reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning

 

Each test contains a mixture of standard format and multiple choice questions, divided into timed sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

When it comes to preparing for the 11 Plus exam, it really helps to be organised. The more time your child has to study for the tests, the better chance they’ll have of performing well. It’s a good idea to create a study timetable with your child that maps out what days they’ll study and what topics they’ll cover. Preparation for the 11 Plus usually begins several months in advance of the exam, so the sooner your child starts revising, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas.

 

In addition to working from a structured plan, we recommend using practice exam papers early in your child’s revision. Not only do practice tests help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses but they help familiarise students with the layout of the exam and the types of questions they may be asked on the day.

 

In the lead up to the tests, we’d recommend having your child sit practice exam papers under exam conditions so that they get used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.  Practice papers can also help improve time management skills.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Chesham Grammar School

Chesham Grammar School was founded in 1947. Located in White Hill, Chesham, the school is co-educational and welcomes students aged between 11 and 18. Chesham Grammar has Academy, Specialist and Humanities College status. The school consistently produces good exam results and in previous years has been rated as outstanding by OFSTED. In 2015, the school was ranked 37th in the list of the best schools in the country at GCSE level. Chesham Grammar also has a good record of pupils gaining places on the Prime Minister’s Fellowship programme.

11 Plus Exam Information for Chesham Grammar School

 

Address: Chesham Grammar School, White Hill, Chesham, Bucks, HP5 1BA

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: office@cheshamgrammar.org, 01494 782854

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,251 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Chesham Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Chesham Grammar School is part of the Buckinghamshire Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme and follows their process for Year 7 admissions. Bucks County Council produces a ‘Transfer Testing Process’ leaflet and a ‘How to Register’ guide that provides more information on the admission process.

 

Bucks County Council also sends out information about the 11 Plus to their primary schools, which provides details on the testing process. Parents who live outside of Buckinghamshire can still apply for their child to sit the Bucks 11 Plus exam by registering at an earlier date. For more information on early registration, you can contact Bucks council directly.

 

In order to be considered for a place at Chesham Grammar School, students need to meet the required qualifying score in the 11 Plus exam, which has been set at 121 by an independent review panel.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Chesham Grammar School

 

Pupils who attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered for the 11 Plus exam, unless parents request for their child to be withdrawn from the process. Parents from outside of Buckinghamshire can still register their child by contacting Buckinghamshire County Council directly.

 

The school also hosts open evenings in September for prospective students and parents, where you’ll have the chance to meet the school staff and ask any questions about admission.

 

Chesham Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Chesham Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two tests that each last approximately 50 minutes. The tests assess:

 

  • Verbal reasoning ability (including comprehension and cloze)
  • Non-verbal reasoning ability
  • Numerical ability

 

Scores are age-standardised to ensure that older students don’t have an advantage based on their age.

 

How to Prepare for the Chesham Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Preparing for the 11 Plus exam requires organisation. It’s a good idea to create a revision timetable with your child to ensure that they cover each topic. The sooner your child starts studying for the tests, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we recommend introducing practice exam papers early in the studying process. Not only do practice tests help familiarise students with the layout of the exam but they help them get used to the types of questions they may be asked on the day.

 

Doing timed practice papers under exam conditions in the lead up to the exam can help improve time management skills. The more practice your child has in answering questions quickly and under pressure, the more comfortable they’ll feel on the day of the tests.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Chesham Grammar School 11+ exam:

 

 

The information provided about Chesham Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Chatham Grammar School for Girls website

Chatham Grammar School for Girls was founded in 1907. Located in Chatham, in Kent, the school admits girls aged between 11 and 18. The school has been rated as Outstanding by Ofsted and in 2008, won the Spanish School of the Year award from the UK Spanish Embassy. The school has a reputation for producing consistently good GCSE and A Level results, particularly in English, where the school has produced some of the best results in the UK.

 

For an insight into what life is like at Chatham Grammar School for Girls, check out this video from one of their activity weeks:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Chatham Grammar School for Girls

 

Address: Chatham Grammar School for Girls, Rainham Road, Chatham, ME5 7EH

County: Kent

Admissions Info: postbox@chathamgirlsgrammar.medway.sch.uk, 01634 851262

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 902 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 142

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus/CEM

 

Chatham Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

In Year 7, there are 142 places available based on performance in the entrance exam. Chatham Grammar School uses the Medway admission criteria to determine which pupils are eligible for a place. Each school within the Medway local authority uses a slightly different allocation criteria, with some focusing solely on performance in the 11 Plus exam, and others using additional criteria, like distance from the school. Parents should confirm the exact admission criteria for Chatham Grammar School for Girls with the school before completing the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

Children who attend a primary school in Medway take the 11 Plus exam at their current school. Those who live outside the area, will take the exam in an independent centre. The Medway Test is used only by Medway grammar schools and isn’t used by other schools in the Kent area.

 

However, the Chatham Grammar Schools, as an exception, do admit students who pass either the Medway Test, or the Kent Test.

 

More information on the Chatham Grammar School for Girls exam, can be accessed on the Medway local authority website, here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Chatham Grammar School for Girls

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Chatham Grammar School for Girls, parents need to complete the Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority. More detailed information about the registration process is published in the booklet Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents, which is distributed to all primary schools in the Medway area. Additionally, there are opportunities for parents and students to visit the school in October to learn more about the admissions process and to visit the school grounds.

 

In the case of over-subscription for places, the school uses its over-subscription criteria to determine which students are given priority.

 

Chatham Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

This year, the Medway exam will be created by the Centre of Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). The Chatham Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus exam consists of:

  • A verbal reasoning test
  • A Maths test
  • An English (extended writing) test

The verbal reasoning and Maths tests last 50 minutes each and both are in multiple choice format. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and last 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

How to Prepare for the Chatham Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

When it comes to preparing for the 11 Plus entrance exam, it’s best to start revising early. The sooner your daughter starts studying for the tests, the more time she’ll have to improve her score.

 

We advise that it’s best for students to create a revision timetable that outlines everything they need to cover before the exam date. We encourage pupils to introduce practice exam papers early in their revision, so they can identify their strengths and weaknesses.

 

In the lead up to the exam, it’s a good idea to encourage your daughter to do practice papers under exam conditions, so she gets used to answering questions quickly and under pressure. Not only do practice exam papers help students familiarise themselves with the types of questions they may be asked, but they can also help improve time managements skills.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Chatham Grammar School for Girls 11+ exam:

 

11+ CEM Maths

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Comprehension

 

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

 

11+ English Spelling

 

The information provided about Chatham Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Chelmsford County High School for Girls website

Chelmsford County High School for Girls was founded in 1906. Located in Chelmsford, in Essex, the school accepts girls aged between 11 and 18 years old. CCHS, as it’s known locally, is considered one of the most competitive schools in the area to gain admission. It is considered one of the highest performing in the UK with students frequently scoring top marks at GCSE and A Level.  CCHS has Technology, Music and Language College status and converted to an academy in 2011.

 

For an insight into life in Year 7 at Chelmsford County High School for Girls, check out this welcome video:

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Chelmsford County High School for Girls

 

Address: Chelmsford County High School for Girls, Broomfield Road, Chelmsford, CM1 1RW

County: Essex

Admissions Info: admissions@cchs.essex.sch.uk, 01245 352592

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 889+ (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Durham University)

 

Chelmsford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Chelmsford County High School for Girls is based on a pupil’s performance in the 11 Plus entrance exam. All applicants must satisfy the school’s criteria and it should be noted that passing the entrance test isn’t a guarantee of a place in Year 7. A formal application should be made through the pupil’s local authority in order to be eligible to take the entrance test.

More information on the CCHS admissions process can be found on the school website, here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Chelmsford County High School for Girls

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Chelmsford County High School for Girls, parents need to register their child by completing the online application form on the school website. The school also has a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which provides more information on the registration process.

 

CCHS should be named on the student’s Common Application Form (CAF), which can be submitted online, or by post to the school. In order to submit the form online, parents will need a passcode to gain access to the admission section of the site. In order to obtain a passcode, parents need to first of all, register their email address on the site, here. Paper registrations are also accepted and can be obtained by emailing the school directly at admissions@cchs.essex.sch.uk.

 

Additional documents needed to complete the Supplementary Information Form (SIF), include:

 

  1. A passport-sized photograph of the applicant
  2. Proof of address, including a council tax bill, and two utility bills
  3. A copy of your tenancy agreement, if living in rented property.
  4. Evidence to support request for special requirements.
  5. Evidence to support Pupil Premium eligibility, or Looked After Child status.

 

Chelmsford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The CCHS 11 Plus exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 60 minutes. Each test contains a mix of the following elements:

 

  • Vocabulary, comprehension, verbal reasoning
  • Numerical reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning

 

The verbal reasoning test contains literacy and comprehension questions, rather than the usual verbal reasoning questions you’d typically find in the 11 Plus.

 

How to Prepare for the Chelmsford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

Preparation for the 11 Plus entrance exam should begin early. The sooner your daughter begins her preparation, the more time she’ll have to improve any weak areas.

 

We advise students to create a revision timetable that covers all the elements they’ll need to know for the exam. Additionally, introducing practice exam papers early can provide a good indication of their current abilities.

 

As the exam approaches, it’s a good idea to have your daughter do timed practice papers, so she gets used to answering questions quickly and under pressure. The more practice papers she completes under test conditions, the better her time management skills will become.

 

Not only do practice exam papers help with time management, but they’re also a great way to help familiarise your child with the types of questions they may be asked on the day of the test. They also help students become familiar with the layout of the exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Chelmsford County High School for Girls 11+ exam:

 

Eleven Plus Comprehension (CEM)

Eleven Plus Cloze (CEM)

Eleven Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

Eleven Plus Long Numerical Reasoning

Eleven Plus Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

Eleven Plus English Spelling

 

The information provided about Chelmsford County High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Carre's Grammar School website

Carre’s Grammar School was founded in 1604. A selective secondary school, Carre’s admits boys aged between 11 and 18. The school also has a co-educational sixth form. Located in Sleaford, in Lincolnshire, the school became an academy in 2011. Carre’s Grammar offers many clubs and societies, including sports clubs, language clubs, and music activities. Students from the school also frequently participate in the Duke of Edinburgh Award scheme.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Carre’s Grammar School

 

Address: Carre’s Grammar School, Northgate, Sleaford, NG34 7DD

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@carres.uk, 01529 302181

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 766 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Carre’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Carre’s Grammar School in Year 7 is governed by the Lincolnshire County Council’s Co-ordinated Admission Scheme. The governing body makes all decisions relating to admissions.

 

In order to gain a place at the school, pupils must firstly qualify under the school’s selection arrangements. At Carre’s Grammar, admission is based on student performance in the 11 Plus exam. The exam is set by GL Assessments and is age standardised. It’s worth noting that good performance in the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of a place at the school.

 

In the case of over-subscription, the school uses the following criteria to determine allocation priority to:

 

  1. Children who are, or who have been in looked-after care.

 

  1. Students who are registered for the Pupil Premium.

 

  1. Pupils who have brothers or sisters already at the school.

 

  1. Children who have attended one of the partner primary schools of Carre’s Grammar.

 

  1. Students who live closest to the school.

 

More information on the admission process to the school is available on the school website, here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Carre’s Grammar School

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Carre’s Grammar School, parents should complete the Common Application Form (CAF), which is available from the Lincolnshire County Council website. A registration form should also be completed, both of which can be obtained from this link.

 

More information about how to register for the 11 Plus exam at the school is given to the partner primary schools in April/May. Registration packs are sent out, which contain information about the tests and registration. It’s advised that these packs are completed and returned shortly after.

 

Parents of students who live outside the Lincolnshire county, can still apply for a place at the school. In such cases, the application form can be downloaded from the Consortium website, here.

 

Registration forms should be returned to the primary schools, or directly to Carre’s Grammar. The 11 Plus exam is taken at the Grammar School, although children from selective areas are able to take the exam at their own school.

 

Carre’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus exam at Carre’s Grammar School, consists of two tests:

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning

 

The verbal reasoning test is taken first and last approximately 50 minutes, in which time pupils will be given 80 multiple choice questions. The non-verbal reasoning test is taken one week after the verbal test and consists of 70 questions (which include spatial reasoning). This test is also multiple choice and is answered one section at a time, as per the examiner’s instructions.

 

How to Prepare for the Carre’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Preparing for the 11 Plus exam requires organisation. It’s recommended that your child starts studying for the tests several months before the exam date. The sooner your child starts revising, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that practice exam papers, coupled with a revision timetable is one of the most effective ways for your child to prepare. Not only do practice papers help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they familiarise students with the layout of the exam and get them used to the types of questions that they may be asked on the day.

 

We’ve written several posts on our blog about how to prepare for the 11 Plus exam. We recommend having a read through the following:

 

 

We also produce exam papers that follow a similar structure to the GL Assessment tests that your child will take at Carre’s Grammar. We specifically recommend the following resources to help your child prepare:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

The information provided about Carre’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Calday Grammar School website

Calday Grange Grammar School was founded in 1636. Located in Birkenhead, the school is a non-denominational, selective grammar school. A boys’ grammar, Calday Grange admits students aged between 11 and 18. The school also has a co-educational sixth form. The school is the oldest grammar in the Wirral and gained academy status in 2013.

 

In 2015, the school achieved a 99.2% A Level pass rate and all students who applied to university were accepted by their first-choice. Sports play a big part in the school with students competing at local, regional and national level.

 

For an insight into life in Year 7 at Calday Grange Grammar School, check out this promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Calday Grange Grammar School

 

Address: Calday Grange Grammar School, Grammar School Lane, Birkenhead, CH48 8GG

County: Wirral

Admissions Info: theschool@calday.co.uk, 0151 625 2727

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1300+ (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 200

Open Day Date: November and March

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (Durham University)

 

Calday Grange Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Calday Grange admits students from all areas of the Wirral and welcomes students from surrounding areas to apply for entry in Year 7. Admission to the school is based on student performance in the 11 Plus exam. Students who attend a primary school in Wirral will take the test at their school, and pupils who live out with the county can take the test at one of the four Wirral selective schools.

 

It’s worth noting however, that good performance in the 11 Plus exam does not guarantee a place at the school. The 11 Plus exam is administered by the Wirral Consortium of Schools and follows the CEM Durham University exam format.

 

In cases where a pupil performance in the exam has been affected by illness, or other exceptional circumstances, parents can write to the school in explanation. The information will be considered by the Independent Assessment Board and parents will be notified of the outcome.

 

The school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded from their website, here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Calday Grange Grammar School

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to Calday Grange, in the first instance, parents are asked to complete an Expression of Interest form. Afterwards, parents and students will be invited to an informal meeting with other interested families. These meetings aim to give parents and pupils a general overview of the school and more information on the admission procedure.

 

The next step in the application process is to attend a Taster Day. Here, students and parents will have the opportunity to meet the school staff, attend lessons and tour the school grounds.

 

After attending the Taster Day, if students are keen to attend the school, parents need to complete the school registration form, which is available directly from the school.

 

Calday Grange Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at Calday Grange Grammar School consists of two tests that will cover Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Ability.

 

Each test lasts approximately 50 minutes and contains a mixture of multiple choice and standard format questions. Test results are age-standardised to ensure that no pupil has an advantage based on their age.

 

How to Prepare for the Calday Grange Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The most effective approach to studying for the 11 Plus exam is to prepare well in advance of the exam date. The sooner your child starts studying for the tests, the more time they’ll have to improve their overall performance.

 

It’s a good idea for parents to create a study timetable with their child to ensure that they cover everything they’ll need to know. In addition, we recommend introducing practice exam papers early. Not only do practice papers enable you to identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can help your child become familiar with the exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked.

 

As exam day approaches, you should encourage your child to do timed practice papers under exam conditions. This will help them get used to answering questions under pressure.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for the Calday Grange 11+ exam:

 

Eleven Plus: Comprehension (CEM) Pack 1

Eleven Plus: Cloze (CEM) Pack 1

Eleven Plus: Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

Eleven Plus: Numeracy (CEM) Pack 1

Eleven Plus: English Spelling

 

The information provided about Calday Grange Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Caistor Grammar School website

Caistor Grammar School is a co-educational, selective grammar with academy status. Founded in 1630, the school is located in Caistor, in Lincolnshire. Known as one of the top-performing schools in the East Midlands, Caistor has won awards in sports and humanities. 11 Plus entry to the school is competitive and applications are often made from outside the town of Caistor. The school is currently ranked highly in terms of performance at GCSE and A Level and has gained 100% 5 A* to C grades in recent years. The school operates a house system with house, sports, and performing arts captains. The three school houses are Hansard, Ayscough, and Rawlinson.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Caistor Grammar School

 

Address: Caistor Grammar School, Church Street, Caistor, Lincoln, LN7 6QJ

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: admissions@caistorgrammar.com, 01472 851250

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 639 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 95

Open Day Date: May

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL or CEM

 

Caistor Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Although Caistor Grammar follows the Lincolnshire County Co-ordinated Admission Scheme, it’s not part of the Lincolnshire Consortium and therefore administers its own 11 Plus tests. More information on co-ordinated admission arrangements can be found on the Lincolnshire council website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Caistor Grammar School

 

The first step to applying for 11 Plus entry to the school is to register your child using the online application form, which can be printed from the school website, here.

 

The school also encourages parents and students to attend their open evening, which takes place in May. The open evening provides pupils and their parents the opportunity to visit the school and meet some of the staff. There is also a talk given by the Headmaster on the night.

 

Caistor Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at Caistor Grammar School is administered by the school itself and isn’t part of the Lincolnshire Consortium. The exam consists of two verbal reasoning tests, one of which is multiple choice and the other is in standard format, where students have to write and explain their answers.

 

In order to be eligible for entry to the school in Year 7, pupils need to attain a minimum aggregate score of 220. A 15-minute practice paper is administered before the exam begins in order to help familiarise students with the types of questions that they’ll be asked.

 

How to Prepare for the Caistor Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

As with any exam, the sooner you start preparing, the more time you’ll have to improve your performance. We recommend creating a study timetable with your child to make sure that they cover everything they’ll need to know for the tests. A ‘little but often’ approach usually works best and ensures that they don’t become overwhelmed with the workload.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a significant amount of your child’s study time should be spent working on exam technique. By introducing practice exam papers early as part of your child’s revision, you’ll be able to identify their strengths and weaknesses and adjust their study timetable accordingly.

 

We’ve written several articles on our blog about studying for the exam. Some of which include:

 

 

Practice exam papers are a great way to familiarise your child with the layout of the 11 Plus exam, and it gets them used to the types of questions they may be asked on the day. In the months leading up to the test, it’s a good idea to introduce timed papers into your child’s revision. Doing practice tests under exam conditions, within the allocated time period can help improve your child’s time management skills.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Caistor Grammar School 11 Plus exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

 

The information provided about Caistor Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Bournemouth School website

Bournemouth School is a co-educational boys’ grammar school in Charminster, Bournemouth. The school admits pupils between the ages of 11 and 18. In 2011, Bournemouth School became an academy but kept its original name and uniform. The school is funded by the government, rather than the local authority and has close ties with Bournemouth School for Girls.

 

The school operates a house system to encourage pupils from all year groups to have good relationships. The houses compete in a range of competitions, including sports and academia. The five houses are: Darwin, Scott, Turner, Newton, Elgar. The school also has an active Combined Cadet Force (CCF), which is unusual for a state-funded school.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bournemouth School

 

Address: Bournemouth School, East Way, Bournemouth, BH8 9PY

County: Dorset

Admissions Info: office@bournemouth-school.org, 01202 512609

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1085 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Bournemouth School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Bournemouth School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 150 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open evenings, which take place in July. More information about the admissions process is provided on the night and students will have the opportunity to meet with staff and the Headmaster.

 

Once your son has taken the entrance exam, an application needs to be made through your local authority’s application system. In most cases, applications can be made online through your local authority’s website.

 

Any late applications will be handled after all those received within the deadline have been dealt with. In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its over-subscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Students who are, or have previously been in looked-after care.
  • Those with the highest test scores
  • Pupils who live in Bournemouth and are ineligible for a Pupil Premium grant.
  • Those who live outside of Bournemouth and are eligible for a Pupil Premium grant.

 

For more information on Bournemouth School’s admission criteria, please follow this link.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bournemouth School

 

Parents of students who wish to register their son to sit the entrance tests, need to register with the school before the exam date. The registration form can be completed online here.

 

Late registrations will only be accepted in certain situations, such as illness, bereavement, or other circumstances out with control of the parents.

 

For pupils who were registered after the closing date, there is an opportunity to sit the entrance exam once the first round of allocations is completed.

 

Bournemouth School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at Bournemouth School for Girls consists of an English, Maths, and Verbal Reasoning test. Each test paper includes questions typical to the KS2 national curriculum.

 

Parents will be notified of the test results in October, which will indicate whether the student has attained the required score to be eligible for admission. It’s important to note however, that passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of entry to the school.

 

All three tests are in multiple choice format and last around 50 minutes each.

 

How to Prepare for the Bournemouth School 11 Plus Exam?

 

It’s best to start preparing for the 11 Plus exam early. The more time your child has to study, the more time they’ll have to improve any gaps in their knowledge. We recommend a ‘little but often’ approach to studying for the entrance exam, by mapping out a study timetable. This way, you’ll ensure that your child covers everything they’ll need to know for the exam but won’t become overwhelmed by the workload.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we’ve written several articles on studying for the exam. Some of which include:

 

 

We believe in introducing practice exam papers early in your child revision. Not only do practice papers help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can familiarise them with the layout of the tests and the types of questions they may be asked.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for format, content and style of the Bournemouth School 11 Plus exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Problem Solving Pack (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL-style)

11+ Spelling

 

The information provided about Bournemouth School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Bournemouth School for Girls website

Bournemouth School for Girls is a girls’ grammar academy in Bournemouth, Dorset. The school admits girls aged between 11 and 18 and, since 2005, has been a humanities specialist school.

 

The school operates a house system with deputy captains that make up the Senior team. Within each house, girls are assigned different prefect positions in relation to sports, performing arts, and charities. Each house is named after an influential woman as follows: Jane Austen, Marie Curie, Rosalind Franklin, Rosa Parks, Christina Rossetti, and Mary Shelley.

 

The school offers a range of sporting activities including yoga, urban funk, golf and basketball. Like Bournemouth School, the girls’ school also has an active Combined Cadet Force, which is rare for a state-funded school.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to be a pupil at Bournemouth School for Girls, check out this promotional video:

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bournemouth School for Girls

 

Address: Bournemouth School for Girls, Castle Gate Close, Castle Gate West, Bournemouth, BH8 9UJ

County: Dorset

Admissions Info: office@bsg.bournemouth.sch.uk, 01202 526289

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1108 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 162

Open Day Dates: July/September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Bournemouth School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

Bournemouth School for Girls aims to provide a selective education to its pupils. Admission to the school in Year 7 follows the procedure as agreed by the co-ordinated admission arrangements.

 

Girls are admitted to the school based on their performance in the entrance examination, which is the same exam administered by the consortium. Although the exam is the same across every school, each has its own admissions authority and over-subscription criteria.

 

Bournemouth School for Girls encourages prospective students and their parents to attend their open evening, which takes place in July and September. Pupils will have the opportunity to meet the school staff and visit the school grounds.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bournemouth School for Girls

 

Parents who want to register their child with the school can do so by completing an online registration form on the school website at www.bsg.bournemouth.sch.uk . Paper registration forms are also available directly from the school.

 

Any late applications will be handled after all those received within the deadline have been dealt with. In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its over-subscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Students who are, or have previously been in looked-after care.
  • Those with the highest test scores
  • Pupils who live in Bournemouth and are ineligible for a Pupil Premium grant.
  • Those who live outside of Bournemouth and are eligible for a Pupil Premium grant.

 

Bournemouth School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at Bournemouth School for Girls consists of a Maths test, an English test and a Verbal Reasoning test. The exam is based one the KS2 curriculum.

 

Parents will be notified of the test results in October, which will indicate whether the student has attained the required score to be eligible for admission. It’s important to note however, that passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of entry to the school.

 

All three tests are in multiple choice format and last around 50 minutes each.

 

How to Prepare for the Bournemouth School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

The best approach to studying for the 11 Plus exam is to adopt a ‘little but often’ approach. The sooner your child starts revising for the tests, the more time they’ll have to improve their weak areas.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we’ve written several articles on studying for the exam. Some of which include:

 

 

It’s a good idea to create a revision timetable with your child to ensure that they cover everything they’ll need to know for the exam. In addition, we recommend introducing practice exam papers early in your child’s revision. Practice papers can help identify strengths and weaknesses and familiarise your child with the exam layout.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Bournemouth School for Girls 11 Plus exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Mathematics Problem Solving (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL-style)

11+ English Spelling

 

The information provided about Bournemouth School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Bourne Grammar School

Bourne Grammar School was founded in 1330 and is a co-educational grammar. Prior to gaining academy status in 2012, the school used to be an Arts College. Bourne Grammar operates a house system, with each one named after its original leader. The four houses are Behn, Meitner, Rorschach and Tinbergen.

 

The school has a reputation for producing good exam results and is within the top three best performing schools in the East Midlands. Bourne Grammar School is also known for its sports and PE is one of the most popular subjects at the school. Some of the sporting activities on offer include netball, rugby, gymnastics, cricket, and orienteering.

 

Music and Drama are also on the Year 7 curriculum and students have many opportunities to get involved in school productions, concerts and performances.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Bourne Grammar School, check out this promotional video:

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bourne Grammar School

 

Address: Bourne Grammar School, South Road, Borne, PE10 9JE

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: admissions@bourne-grammar.lincs.sch.uk, 01778 422 288

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 150 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Bourne Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Bourne Grammar School is determined by student performance in the 11 Plus exam. The exam takes place in September for entry the following year and consists of a verbal, non-verbal and spatial awareness test.

 

The 11 Plus exam at Bourne Grammar is co-ordinated by the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools. The consortium has agreed an admission to Bourne Grammar of 150 Year 7 pupils each year, in keeping with the current size of the school. In cases where there are more applicants than spaces available, the consortium uses an over-subscription criteria which requires students to have a standardised score of 220 or more and:

 

  • Have special educational needs, or a health and care plan.
  • Are in public care or have previously been in the past.
  • Have a sibling at the school.
  • Live within driving distance to the school.

 

For more information on the Bourne Grammar School admissions policy, visit this link.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bourne Grammar School

 

To apply to sit the Bourne Grammar School 11 Plus exam, students need to apply by completing the registration form, which can be found here. Before registering, parents and students are encouraged to visit the school during its open evening, which normally takes place in June. This gives students and parents the opportunity to meet with staff and talk with current pupils at the school.

 

Bourne Grammar advises that students are registered sooner rather than later as places in Year 7 are limited. Once your child is registered, details of the testing days are sent by post, around September.

 

Bourne Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam at Bourne Grammar consists of two tests: a verbal reasoning, and a non-verbal and spatial reasoning test. The scores from each are combined and only students who attain 220 or above will be considered for entry. However, it’s worth noting that passing the exam does not guarantee a place at the school.

 

The verbal reasoning test is taken first and consists of 80 questions, lasting around 50 minutes. Questions are multiple choice and split into individual sections, with 5 or 6 questions in each. Answer sheets are marked by a third-party organisation using an electronic marking device.

 

The Non-Verbal & Spatial Reasoning test is taken one week after the verbal reasoning. The test consists of 70 questions, split over 5 sections and must be answered one section at a time, as instructed by the invigilator. Students have 7 minutes to complete each section.

 

The results of the 11 Plus exam will be sent by post in October.

 

How to Prepare for the Bourne Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The best approach to studying for the 11 Plus exam is to adopt a ‘little but often’ approach. The sooner your child starts revising for the tests, the more time they’ll have to improve their weak areas.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we’ve written several articles on studying for the exam. Some of which include:

 

 

It’s a good idea to create a revision timetable with your child to make sure that they cover everything they’ll need to know for the exam. We also encourage students to use practice exam papers early in their revision as a way of gauging their current abilities. By regularly doing practice exam papers, your child will become familiar with the layout of the tests and the types of questions that may be asked on the day.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Bourne Grammar School 11 Plus exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following relevant resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Non Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

The information provided about Bourne Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Boston High School website

Boston High School was founded in 1914 and admits students aged between 11 and 18. The school is a selective grammar for girls and is located in Boston, Lincolnshire. The school also has a co-educational sixth form college, which enables boys to study at the school in their final year. In 2013, the school became an academy whilst retaining its original name.

 

Boston High School has close links with Boston Grammar School and an umbrella trust exists to support collaboration between the two schools. In 2014, the school was rated as having ‘outstanding’ leadership, behaviour and safety by Ofsted.

 

The school operates a house system, with each house named after significant figures in the school’s history. There are five school houses; Allan, Conway, Ingelow, Kitwood and Lindis.

11 Plus Exam Information for Boston High School

 

 

Address: Boston High School, Spilsby Road, Boston, PE21 9PF

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@bostonhighschool.co.uk, 01205 350235

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 689 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Boston High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Boston High School admits pupils based on their results in the 11 Plus exam. The required level of attainment is set out by the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools. Only pupils who achieve the desired results will be considered for entry to the school.

 

Students who satisfy the entry requirements are offered a place although it should be noted that passing the 11 Plus exam doesn’t guarantee your daughter a place at the school.

 

In order to be considered for entry in Year 7, students need to be registered through the co-ordinated admissions scheme as set out by Lincolnshire County Council. All applications for entry need to be submitted by parents online, or through the local authority’s Common Application Form (CAF).

 

In cases where there are more qualified students than available places, the local authority uses its over-subscription criteria to determine admissions. Priority is given to pupils who:

 

  • Are in local authority care, or have previously been looked-after by the local authority.
  • Have a sibling who already attends the school.
  • Lives within driving distance to the school.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Boston High School

 

In order to apply for entry to Year 7 at the school, students need to be registered to sit the 11 Plus exam. The registration form can be found on the Boston High School website here, and copies are also sent to primary schools in the area.

 

Registration forms need to be returned to the school before the deadline date in March. Lincolnshire County Council will then write to parents, requesting the student’s preferences for secondary schools. This application form should be completed and returned to the local authority by October.

 

For students who live outside of the Lincolnshire area, parents need to contact their own local authority for details on how to state Boston High School as their child’s preferred choice.

 

The verbal reasoning test takes place in September at your daughter’s primary school. Approximately one week later, students then take the non-verbal/spatial awareness test, also at their primary school.

 

Results of the 11 Plus exam are posted to parents and by March, the local authority will send out offers of places.

Boston High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

 

The 11 Plus Exam at Boston High School consists of two tests:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning/spatial awareness

 

Both tests are taken at the students’ primary schools although arrangements can be made with the High School for pupils to sit the test there. In order to select the top 25% of pupils, the tests are ranked in order and age standardised.

 

How to Prepare for the Boston High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Studying for the 11 Plus exam requires planning. It’s best to encourage your child to start revising sooner rather than later, so you have a good general overview of their abilities. A study timetable can help ensure that they cover all the material they’ll need to know for the exam and it can help ensure that they stick to a regular study schedule

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that your child will also benefit from working through practice exam papers early on in the revision. Practice papers are a great way to test your child’s current abilities and identify any weak areas that need improving. Regular testing with practice papers is a good way to chart your child’s progress and it helps familiarise them with the exam layout and the types of questions they’ll be asked on the day.

 

In the weeks leading up to the exam, it’s a good idea to have your child do timed practice papers under exam conditions so they get used to answering questions to a deadline. The more they practice with timed papers, the more their time management skills will improve.

 

We have several Eleven Plus practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Boston High School 11 Plus exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following relevant resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

 

The information provided about Boston High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Boston Grammar School website

Established in 1555, Boston Grammar School (or BGS for short) is a selective grammar for boys aged 11 to 18. The school also admits girls into its Sixth Form. Located in Boston, Lincolnshire, the school became a selective academy in 2013. Boston operates a house system, whereby pupils are placed into one of four houses to encourage loyalty, competition and pastoral care. The four houses at Boston Grammar are named after important figures in the school’s history: Muston, Laughton, Gannock, and Parry.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Boston Grammar School

 

Address: Boston Grammar School, Rowley Road, Boston, PE21 6JY

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@bostongrammarschool.co.uk , 01205 366444

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 507 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 115

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Boston Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. At Boston Grammar, the 11 Plus is co-ordinated by the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools, where 12 of the 14 grammars in the county follow the same test procedures.

 

Students normally take the Eleven Plus tests at their current primary schools, although arrangements can be made for them to sit the exam at BGS, subject to agreement between the school heads. Students who score within the top 25% of the exam will be considered for admission to the school, which is the same as the percentage intake across all Lincolnshire grammar schools.

 

Pupils who meet the required standards in the 11 Plus and satisfy the school’s location criteria will be offered a place in Year 7, subject to availability. It’s important to note that good performance in the exam itself, does not necessarily guarantee a place at the school.

 

In cases where there are more successful applicants than places available at the school, the local authority uses its over-subscription criteria to decide which students will be accepted. In such cases, priority will be given to students who:

 

  • Are in local authority care, or have previously been looked-after by the local authority.
  • Have a sibling who already attends the school.
  • Live within driving distance of the school.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Boston Grammar School

 

Parents can register their child for entry in Year 7 at Boston Grammar by completing the school’s registration form, which is available here. Applicants must be registered before they can take the 11 Plus exam.

 

Boston Grammar School sends out information packs to the parents of children in Year 5 of primary schools in the area. The packs are sent out around April/May and provide further information about the registration process, including the registration form and information about the exam itself.

 

Parents of children who live outside of Lincolnshire, or who live in a non-selective area of the county can apply directly to the school by completing the Application Form from the Consortium website, here.

 

Completed registration forms should be returned to the student’s primary school, or sent directly to the grammar school by post. The forms also provide the opportunity to inform the school of any special education needs, or disability that may have an impact on the exam arrangements.

 

Boston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Boston Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of two tests:

 

  • Verbal reasoning, and
  • Non-verbal reasoning

 

The verbal reasoning test is taken first and consists of around 80 questions, split over 3 sections. The paper lasts for 50 minutes and all questions are multiple choice.

 

The non-verbal reasoning test is taken one week after the verbal reasoning exam. There are approximately 70 questions, split over 5 sections and all questions are multiple choice.

 

How to Prepare for the Boston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

When it comes to preparing for the Eleven Plus exam, it’s best to start early. The sooner your child starts revising, the more time they’ll have to increase their knowledge and improve their exam technique.

 

It’s a good idea to create a revision timetable with your child, making sure that they study all the elements of the exam.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we would encourage students to use practice exam papers early in their revision in order to provide an overview of their current abilities. Not only do practice papers help identify students’ strengths and weaknesses, but they help familiarise them with the layout of the exam.

 

Regularly testing your child with exam practice papers can be also be a good way of monitoring their progress.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Boston Grammar School 11 Plus exam.

 

We recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Non Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)

 

The information provided about Boston Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Borden Grammar School website

Established in 1878, Borden Grammar School, is a selective Boy’s Grammar located in Sittingbourne, in Kent. The school educates pupils aged between 11 and 18 and has academy status. Although a boy’s grammar, the school does admit girls into its sixth form.

 

In 2006, Borden was awarded specialist school status in Sports and Modern Foreign Languages. As a result, the school received an increase in funding, which led to the development of a new library, a multi-use games area and a new private study area. The school also received a sports bursary in 2011, which was used to build a climbing wall in the gym.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Borden Grammar School

 

Address: Borden Grammar School, Avenue of Remembrance, Sittingbourne, ME10 4DB

County: Kent

Admissions Info:   school@bordengrammar.kent.sch.uk, 01795 424192

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 778 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Exam (GL)

 

Borden Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Borden Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. The Borden Grammar website states that the principal behind admissions to the school is to ‘maintain the character’ of a selective school.

 

Borden Grammar expects its pupils to demonstrate a strong work ethic and commitment to their studies.  In order to be eligible to apply for entry in Year 7, students need to have attained the required standard in terms of aptitude.

 

In cases where the number of applicants is greater than the spaces available at the school, Borden Grammar uses the following over-subscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in Local Authority Care
  • Pupils who are eligible for free school meals
  • Students who already have a sibling at the school
  • Health and special access reasons
  • Students who live closest to the school

 

The parents of students who are not awarded a place can appeal the decision in front of an Independent Appeals Panel. Specific details of the appeals process is normally sent to parents at the same time as the offer letters.

 

For some general advice about appeals, take a look at our 11 Plus Appeals Advice post.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Borden Grammar School

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to the school, parents need to complete a registration form and a Common Application Form (CAF). More details about the registration process are available by contacting the school on 01795 424192, or by emailing school@bordengrammar.kent.sch.uk.

 

Borden Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Borden Grammar School follows the Kent 11 Plus exam format, which consists of tests in Reasoning, English and Maths, as well as a writing task.The test is used to assess whether your child is suitable for entry to the school and the format is used by most, but not all, of the 35 wholly selective and 4 partially selective grammar schools in the region.

 

The exam format is as follows:

  • Section 1: A one hour long exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. Broken down into three shorter sections, the test focuses on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  • Section 2: A one hour long exam that tests English and Maths.
  • Section 3:A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. The writing task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases.

Click here for a detailed breakdown of the Kent 11+ Test, including sample question.

 

How to Prepare for the Borden Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The sooner your child starts preparing for the 11 Plus exam, the more time they’ll have to improve their knowledge and exam technique. We advise creating a revision timetable with your child to ensure that they cover everything they’ll need to know for the test. A revision timetable can be as simple as a wall planner or a spreadsheet.

 

For more information on how to prepare for the Eleven Plus, take a look at our post Last Minute Preparation Tips for the 11 Plus Exam.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that the ‘little but often’ approach works best when studying for each test. Try to break down your child’s revision into small sections to ensure that they cover everything they’ll need to know. Additionally, it’s a good idea to dedicate time to improving any weak areas.

 

Practice exam papers can provide parents with a good indication of their child’s current abilities. Introducing practice papers early in your child’s revision will enable you to monitor their progress in the lead up to the exam.

 

We recommend the following resources that have been specifically designed for the Kent Test:

 

 

The following resources will provide excellent subject specific practice:

 

 

The information provided about Borden Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Bishop Wordsworth's School website

Bishop Wordsworth’s School, often shortened to BWS, is an all boys’ grammar school for students aged 11 to 18. Located in Salisbury, Wiltshire, the school was founded in 1889. Bishop’s is consistently identified as one of the top-performing schools for exam results in England and in 2010, the school had the best performance in the English Baccalaureate.

 

In recent years, the school has undergone several redevelopments which have seen the addition of a new classroom block, a drama studio, sports hall, PE facilities, a new sixth form block and a cookery room. The school was granted academy status in 2011 and has been awarded specialisms in Languages and Science.

 

For a general overview of what it’s like to study at Bishop Wordsworth’s School, check out the promotional video below:

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bishop Wordsworth’s School

 

Address: Bishop Wordsworth’s School, Exeter Street, Salisbury, SP1 2ED

County: Wiltshire

Admissions Info: cms@bws.wilts.sch.uk, 01722 333851

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 884 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 160

Open Day Dates: June and July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Bishop Wordsworth’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Bishop’s is a selective grammar school and sets its own admission requirements. Students who live within a reasonable travelling distance are eligible to apply for entry to the school. For more information on the school’s designated area, please click here.

 

In order to gain entry to Bishop’s, all boys must take an entrance examination. Admission is based on students attaining the desired grading in the selection process for the relevant year of entry. The entrance test is used to show that pupils have the appropriate academic ability for the school.

 

If more students pass the 11 Plus exam than there are places available, the school then uses its oversubscription criteria and the waiting list process begins.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bishop Wordsworth’s School

 

In order to apply for 11 Plus entry to BWS, parents need to complete the online registration form. This also provides the school with evidence of the application for its oversubscription criteria. The application form is made available on the school website from May.

 

Any forms received after July will be considered late registrations and given second priority to registrations made on time. Boys who are registered late will sit the 11 Plus exam around November.

 

More information about registering your son at the school can be found in the school’s document Information Leaflet One.

 

Bishop Wordsworth’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Bishop Wordsworth’s School uses The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring CEM) assessment tests for entry to Year 7 and papers are marked by the CEM. Test scores are age-standardised to ensure that no student has an advantage based on his age.

 

The Bishop’s 11 Plus exam consists of two timed papers, lasting 50 minutes each. Each paper tests verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical ability in multiple choice format. It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning also covers topics such as Comprehension and Cloze. Students are expected to be able to demonstrate skills appropriate to the Key Stage 2 English and Maths curriculum.

 

Each paper has its own timed sections and questions are contained within a booklet. Students are required to record their answers on a separate answer sheet.

 

How to Prepare for the Bishop Wordsworth’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The best approach to studying for the 11 Plus is to start early. The sooner your child starts revising, the more time they’ll have to focus on any areas that need improving. To begin with, it’s a good idea to create a study timetable with your child to ensure that they cover all the material they’ll need to know.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we’re big advocates of using practice exam papers as a way of identifying your child’s strengths and weaknesses. By introducing practice papers early, you’ll be able to adjust the focus of your child’s studying to make sure they’re concentrating on their weak areas.

 

As their studying progresses, you can re-introduce the practice papers to monitor your child’s progress. Not only do exam practice papers help identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they also help familiarise students with the format of the 11 Plus exam.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the Bishop Wordsworth’s 11 Plus exam.

 

We recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Bishop Wordsworth’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Bishop Vesey's Grammar School website

Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School, or BVGS was founded in 1527 and is one of the oldest schools in Britain. A state grammar school with academy status, BVGS is located in Sutton Coldfield in the West Midlands. Although no longer under local authority control, the school continues to cooperate closely with Birmingham local authorities in regards to admissions.

 

Until the 1880s, the school offered both day and boarding but now only offers day places. With approximately 945 pupils, the school is known for having good rugby union and hockey teams.

 

The school became a Language College in 2004 and in 2011, it gained Training School status and now provides in-service and work experience training for teachers. BVGS is also a Sixth Form College.

 

For an overview of what it’s like to study at Bishop Vesey’s Grammar, take a look at this promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School

 

Address: Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School, Lichfield Road, Sutton Coldfield, B74 2NH

County: Birmingham

Admissions Info: 0121 250 5400, admissions@birmingham.gov.uk

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 945 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 125

Open Day Dates: July and September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Bishop Vesey’s is part of ‘The Grammar Schools of Birmingham Consortium’ and follows a set admission criteria which is based on pupils’ academic performance in the entrance exam and only boys who attain the required standard will be considered for entry.

 

The consortium arrangements require that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the 11 Plus exam. In order to be eligible for admission, pupils need to attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ in the exam. However, attainment of the qualifying score doesn’t guarantee students a place at the school.

 

Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School no longer offers boarding and pupils are admitted purely on the basis of their 11 Plus test results. All candidates who achieve the qualifying minimum score are then ranked in order with priority given to students who fall within the following criteria:

 

  1. Looked after children, or children who have previously been classified so.
  2. Those who live closest to the school.
  3. Students who are registered for Pupil Premium and are registered for free school meals.

 

Parents can also opt for their child to sit an additional entry test, the scores of which, may be used in appeals cases.

 

More information about the admission policy of Bishop Vesey’s can be found on the school website, via this link.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School

 

In order to apply for admission to the school in Year 7, parents need to register their child by completing the online application form, which can be accessed here. A Change of School application form also needs to be completed and can be obtained by contacting the school directly on 0121 250 5400, or by emailing admissions@birmingham.gov.uk. Additionally, a Test Registration form and a Local Authority Preference form needs to be completed and returned to the school.

 

In order to complete the full application, parents also need to provide a recent passport sized-photograph of their child, which can be emailed alongside the required forms.

 

Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Bishop Vesey’s 11 Plus exam consists of two test papers, each lasting approximately 45 minutes. The papers are separated into individually timed sections that cover:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • Mathematics
  • Reading comprehension/literacy skills

 

Most questions will be multiple choice and scores are age-standardised to ensure that no students have an advantage based on their age. The school also sends out sample questions once they’ve received the student’s application form.

 

More information about the exam format can be found in the Birmingham Familiarisation Booklet.

 

How to Prepare for the Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The sooner your child starts preparing for the 11 Plus exam, the more time they’ll have to hone their skills. In addition to knowing the material, it’s important that they have the exam skills they’ll need on the day.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that using practice exam papers in addition to a study schedule can really help your child improve their chances of doing well. By introducing exam practice papers early, you’ll be able to identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses. You can then adjust their study schedule accordingly.

 

Not only do practice papers help familiarise your child with the exam format, but they help them get used to the type of questions that they may be asked on the day.

 

As the exam approaches, it’s a good idea to encourage your child to do timed practice papers so they get used to answering the questions under pressure. The more timed papers they do, the more their time management skills will improve.

 

We have several 11+ practice papers that can help your child prepare for the Bishop Vesey’s Grammar 11 Plus exam.

 

We recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Bexley Grammar School website

Bexley Grammar School was founded in 1955 and was opened by Sir Edward Heath, who was a Member of Parliament at the time. A Co-educational grammar, Bexley is a specialist Language, Science and Mathematics College and used to have foundational school status before converting to an academy in 2011.

 

From 2017, the school began offering the International Baccalaureate in place of A Levels in Sixth Form. Students who attend the school are placed in one of six ‘houses’, which has around 12 members of staff in each house.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bexley Grammar School

 

Address: Bexley Grammar School, Danson Lane, Welling, DA16 2BL

County: Kent

Admissions Info: enquiries@bexleygs.co.uk, 0208 304 8538

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,481 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 190

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

Bexley Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Bexley Grammar School is selective, following the results of the Bexley Selection Tests, which take place in September. Bexley Grammar School is part of the Bexley Co-ordinated Secondary School Admission Scheme and parents who wish to put their child forward for the tests, should visit the local authority website. Parents also need to complete the Common Application Form (CAF) with the school included in the list of preferences.

 

In order to be eligible for a place at the school, students need to achieve the required score in the selection tests, which are age standardised. Once the scores from the tests are in, they are then considered by a selection panel in order to determine which pupils are ‘deemed selective’.

 

Allocation decisions are based on the test results, although the Headteacher from the pupil’s primary school can request a review of the results if they feel something has been overlooked. In the case of over-subscription to the school, the following criteria is used:

 

  • Looked After Children and Previously Looked After Children
  • Guaranteed Grammar School Place (highest 180 scores)
  • Siblings
  • Staff Children
  • Distance

 

Parents will find out the results of the selection tests in mid-October and in March, the local authority will send details of the school that your child has been offered.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bexley Grammar School

 

To apply for your child to sit the selection tests, you need to register them on the Bexley Local Authority website. Registration forms are made available before applications open. You will also need to complete the Common Application Form, where you can list your child’s preferred schools in order.

 

Bexley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11+ Exam at Bexley Grammar school includes two papers, each lasting around 50 minutes. The papers contain a mixture of the following elements:

 

 

Most of the questions in the test papers are multiple choice, although some of the maths and problem solving questions are asked in standard format, where students will need to present their answers in written form and show their mathematical workings.

 

How to Prepare for the Bexley Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

When it comes to studying for the Eleven Plus, the more organised your child is, the better they’ll be able to cover the material they’ll need to know for the tests. Try creating a revision timetable with your child that maps out what topics they need to study on what days. A revision timetable can be as simple as an Excel spreadsheet or a wall planner and can make all the difference in organising your child’s studying.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that the ‘little but often’ approach to studying works well. If your child revises regularly for short intervals, they’ll retain more information than they would if they studied for long periods of time infrequently.

 

One of the best ways to gauge your child’s current level and abilities is to introduce practice exam papers early. Not only will they help you identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they’ll help your child familiarise themselves with the layout of the exam.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice papers that can help your child prepare for the Bexley Grammar 11 Plus exam.

We recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Bexley Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Beths Grammar School website

Beths Grammar School (known locally as Beths), is a boys’ grammar school located in Bexley, in South-East London. The school was founded in 1945 under the name Erith Technical School and became a grammar in 1976. The school performs well locally with pupils typically achieving A to C grades at GCSE level. Boys are admitted from 11 years old, with girls joining in Sixth Form.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Beths Grammar School, take a look at this Sixth Form Leavers’ video created by students at the school.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Beths Grammar School

 

Address: Beths Grammar School, Hartford Road, Bexley, DA5 1NE

County: Kent

Admissions Info: admin@beths.bexley.sch.uk, 01322 556538

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,199 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 192

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM 11 Plus – University of Durham

 

Beths Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admissions to the school in Year 7 are determined by student performance in the Bexley Selection Test, which take place in September. The school is part of the Bexley Co-ordinated Secondary School Admissions Scheme, which has a set application process alongside other schools in the area.

 

The school is selective, therefore only students who attain the standard set by the local authority are eligible to apply for admittance. The admissions policy is made available on the Bexley Local Authority website prior to applications opening.

 

After your child has taken the selection test, results are sent to parents in October, by which point, the Common Application Form (CAF) should have been returned to the local authority. There are 192 places offered in Year 7 and the school is often over-subscribed. In such cases, places are determined based on the following criteria:

 

1.     Students who are, or have been, Looked After Children.

2.     Those who have achieved the highest 180 scores in the 11 Plus exam.

3.     Children who already have a sibling at the school.

4.     The distance the student lives from the school.

5.     Where distance to the school is identical, selection test scores are then considered.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Beths Grammar School

 

To apply for 11 Plus entry to Beths Grammar, parents need to check that their child meets the admissions criteria. Further details can be found on the Bexley Local Authority website here once applications are open. A registration form and a Common Application Form then needs to be completed on the local authority website.

 

Beths Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Eleven Plus Exam at Beths Grammar consists of two papers that last approximately 50 minutes each. The papers contain a mix of the following elements:

 

 

Most of the questions will be multiple choice, with some of the maths questions asked as standard format questions.

 

How to Prepare for the Beths Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we always advise that it’s best to start 11 Plus preparation early. The sooner your child begins a regular study routine, the more time they’ll have to get used to the types of questions that may be asked in the exam.

 

Usually, a ‘little but often’ approach works best when it comes to studying for the tests. Try breaking down your child’s revision into small chunks to ensure that all the exam elements are covered.

 

Practice exam papers are a great way to help your child get used to the exam layout and the allocated times that they have for each paper. If you introduce practice papers early in your child’s revision, you’ll be able to monitor their improvement as their studying progresses.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice papers that can help your child prepare for the Beths Grammar 11 Plus exam. We recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Beths Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Barton Court Grammar School website

Barton Court Grammar School was originally founded as Barton Court Grammar School for Girls before World War II. The current school is a selective, co-educational Academy of Excellence.

 

The school is situated in Canterbury, Kent and educates approximately 838 students, aged between 11 and 18. The school has previously been rated as ‘Outstanding’ by OFTSTED and has Foreign Language College status. With a range of extra-curricular activities on offer, including a choir, a debating club and an orchestra, the school encourages non-academic interests as well as performance in the classroom.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Barton Court Grammar School

 

Address: Barton Court Grammar School, Longport, Canterbury, CT1 1PH

County: Kent

Admissions Info: 01227 464600

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 838 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

Barton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admissions to Barton Court Grammar School are handled by a Co-ordinated Admission Scheme, administered by the Kent Local Authority. Students are normally admitted in Year 7, after having gained a place through the Kent Procedure for Entry to Secondary Education (PESE). In order to be eligible for admission, parents must include Barton Court Grammar School on the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

In the case of over-subscription, places are determined by a set criteria in priority order. The criteria includes:

 

  • Children in local authority care
  • The family’s current association with the school
  • Special needs, or health reasons
  • The proximity of the school to the student’s home

 

For parents who wish to apply for a place for a child that doesn’t fit the normal age group, a request needs to be made to the school’s Headteacher as early as possible. This enables the admissions authority to make a decision before the application closing date. In such cases, the student in question is expected to have attained the appropriate level in the Kent PESE Tests, although attainment is not a guarantee of a school place.

 

More admissions information is available from the Kent County Council Determined Co-ordinated Scheme for Secondary Admissions 2017/18 document.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Barton Court Grammar School

 

The registration process for entry to grammars in the Kent area differs from school to school, so it’s advised that parents confirm the exact process directly with Barton Court Grammar. In addition to completing the school registration form, parents will also need to complete the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

Barton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Barton Court Grammar follows the Kent 11 Plus exam format, which covers Reasoning, English and Maths.

 

The test is used to assess whether your child is suitable for entry to the school and the format is used by most, but not all, of the 35 wholly selective and 4 partially selective grammar schools in the region.

 

The exam format is as follows:

 

  • Section 1: A one hour long exam that tests students’ reasoning abilities. Broken down into shorter sections, the test focuses on Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.
  • Section 2: A one hour long exam that tests English and Maths
  • Section 3:A writing task that lasts for 40 minutes, including 10 minutes’ preparation time. The writing task isn’t marked for the purposes of the 11 Plus exam but may be used as evidence for borderline cases.

 

How to Prepare for the Barton Court Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Preparing for the 11 Plus exam takes time, that’s why we advise parents to set the wheels in motion early. The sooner you can create a revision timetable with your child, the longer they’ll have to prepare.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that the ‘little but often’ approach works best when studying for the exam. Try to break down your child’s revision into small sections to ensure that they cover everything they’ll need to know. Additionally, it’s a good idea to dedicate time to improving any weak areas.

 

Practice exam papers are a great way to identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses. They can also help your child familiarise themselves with the exam layout and the types of questions they can expect on the day.

 

As exam day approaches, try doing timed practice papers with your child to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.

 

We have several 11+ practice papers that are specifically designed to help students prepare for the Kent Test that is used for Barton Court Grammar 11 Plus admissions.

 

We recommend the following resources:

 

Kent Practice Tests

 

 

English

 

 

Maths

 

 

Verbal Reasoning

 

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning

 

 

The information provided about Barton Court Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the BRGS website

Bacup and Rawtenstall Grammar School (BRGS) was originally founded in 1701 as Newchurch Grammar School. In 1913, the school moved to its current site and was renamed as Bacup and Rawtensall Grammar. The school is a co-educational and selective, with student admission based on performance in the 11 Plus exam.

 

With approximately 1,280 pupils, the school accepts students from Year 7 to Sixth Form. As a selective state school, competition for entry is strong and the school is oversubscribed. Bacup and Rawtenstall has a reputation for producing good exam results and the school consistently ranks well in the UK school league tables.

 

Most school leavers go on to further education with its pupils securing places at some of the UK’s top universities, including the Russell Group and Oxbridge.

 

For a general overview of the school, check out this promotional video made by the BRGS sixth form:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School

 

Address: Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School, Glen Road, Waterfoot, Rossendale, BB4 7BJ.

County: Lancashire

Admissions Info: enquiries@brgs.org.uk, 01706 234500

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 1280 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

BRGS admits students primarily from Bacup, Rawtenstall and the surrounding areas. Year 7 places are allocated based on student performance in the school’s entrance examination, which takes place in September. The school has approximately 180 Year 7 places each year.

 

The school organises an open evening event in June to give students and parents the opportunity to the visit the school in-person and meet staff members before applying for a place.

 

BRGS produces their own application guide, known as The Blue Booklet. The guide is made available to parents on the date of the open evening and can be downloaded from the school website here. The guide includes information regarding the school’s admission policy and contains important information about the application process.

 

In order to be considered for a place at the school, pupils must pass all elements of the entrance exam. However, the school website does state that passing the 11 Plus exam isn’t a guarantee of admission.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School

 

In order to apply for 11 Plus entry to the school, parents need to complete a registration form, which is made available on the school website from September. Additionally, the school’s Common Application From (CAF) needs to be completed online on the school’s website. The CAF for BRGS can be found here.

 

Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Each year, the school publishes its exam format in The Blue Book, which includes a guide to the entrance examination. In previous years, the exam has taken the format of:

 

  • A Maths paper
  • A Verbal Reasoning Paper
  • An English paper.

 

The Maths test lasts for 50 minutes and contains 50 multiple choice questions. The Verbal Reasoning test also lasts for 50 minutes and has 80 multiple choice questions. The English paper lasts for 45 minutes and contains 56 multiple choice questions. The English element of the exam contains two extracts of text with questions relating to the topic. There are also additional questions designed to test spelling, punctuation and grammar.

 

How to Prepare for the Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The key to studying for the 11 Plus exam is to prepare early. The sooner you can establish a study timetable with your child, the more time they’ll have to improve on any weak areas. At Exam Papers Plus, we believe in the ‘little but often’ approach to revision to ensure that your child doesn’t become overwhelmed by the whole experience.

 

One of the most effective ways to chart your child’s progress is to use practice exam papers. If you introduce practice papers early, you’ll get a good indication of your child’s strengths and weaknesses and you’ll have an overview of the elements your child may need to improve before the exam.

 

In the months leading up to the test, re-introduce the practice test papers to see how your child has improved. It’s also a good idea to do timed papers, so your child gets used to answering questions quickly, within the designated exam time.

 

We have several 11+ practice tests that can help your child prepare for the BRGS 11 Plus exam.

 

We recommend the following resources, specifically designed for 11+ GL Assessment exams, like that of Bacup and Rawtenstall Grammar School:

 

 

The information provided about Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Alcester Grammar School website

Alcester Grammar School is a mixed, selective grammar school. Originally established in 1499, the school was known as ‘Newport’s Free School’ before becoming Alcester Grammar in 1912. Located in Alcester, Warwickshire, it was the first in the area to achieve academy status.  

 

As with other grammar schools in Warwickshire, Alcester gives priority to pupils who live within a certain radius of the school. The school currently accepts students from specific locations running from Stratford-Upon-Avon to Long Compton.

 

Alcester Grammar has a reputation for producing excellent GCSE and A Level results.  In 2015, 99% of GCSE students achieved 5 or more A* -C grades in subjects including Maths and English. Previous OFSTED inspections have seen the school graded as Outstanding.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Alcester Grammar School

 

Address: Alcester Grammar School, Birmingham Road, Alcester, B49 5ED

County: Warwickshire

Admissions Info: office@alcestergs.com, 01789 762 494

School Type: Mixed Grammar

Number of pupils: 943 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Warwickshire CEM 11 Plus (University of Durham)

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Alcester Grammar School

 

Warwickshire County Council’s Admissions Service, known as Warwickshire Admissions overseas 11 Plus entry to Alcester School. To apply for entry to the school in Year 7, parents need to register their child for the school’s entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form. The deadline for registration is usually in July ​ and the form needs to be handed in to the local authority. The school’s admissions document states that late registrations will not be considered in the first round of placements.

 

In addition to registering for the exam, Warwickshire Admissions require evidence of the child’s home address. Parents who live in Birmingham need to register for the 11 Plus exam with the grammar schools themselves, rather than the council.

 

Alcester Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Alcester Grammar 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last for approximately 50 minutes each. They contain a mix of standard format and multiple choice questions, covering the following subjects:

 

 

The Verbal reasoning exam also has an English component, which includes a comprehension and cloze test. The Maths exam involves a numeracy test, which tests for ability in mental arithmetic, and problem solving questions.

 

For each paper, students will be given a question booklet and a separate answer sheet, which is marked electronically for accuracy.

 

Alcester Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admissions to grammar schools in Warwickshire and Birmingham are managed by ‘The Grammar Schools in Birmingham Consortium’. Both counties share the same test, which takes place on the same date.

 

Admission to Alcester in Year 7 is decided by the student’s performance in the Eleven Plus exam, in addition to them meeting the location criteria, as outlined above.

 

How to Prepare for the Alcester Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

As with all entrance tests, it’s best to start preparing early. Creating a revision timetable with your child will help make sure that they cover all the material they’ll need to know for the exam. At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that using practice exam papers early in a child’s revision is one of the most effective ways to get ahead. Not only do they help your child improve their time management skills, but they can also help identify their strengths and weaknesses.

 

The practice papers that we produce come complete with answers, enabling you to accurately measure your child’s performance and track their improvements in the lead up to the exam. We have several Eleven Plus practice papers that can help your child prepare for entry to Alcester Grammar.

 

We recommend the following resources:

 

 

The information provided about Alcester Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Adams Grammar School website

Founded in 1656, Adams Grammar School is a selective boys’ school offering day and boarding education in Newport, Shropshire. Currently accommodating around 800 pupils, the school celebrated its 350th year in 2006, which saw the completion of a performing arts centre and a new science block. The school has an increasing number of international students, especially from Hong Kong and is a specialist technology and language college.

 

Adams is regularly listed as one of the top 50 schools in the country and consistently produces good GCSE and A Level results. As a result, the school sees a high number of its graduates attend the Russell Group and Golden Triangle Universities.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Adams Grammar School, take a look at this promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Adams Grammar School

 

Address: Adams Grammar School, High Street, Newport, TF10 7BD

County: Shropshire

Admissions Info: registrar@adamsgs.org.uk, 01952 386300

School Type: Boys Grammar

Number of pupils: 800 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 115

Open Day: March

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham): Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Consortium

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Adams Grammar School

 

Applications for 11 Plus entry in Year 7 are completed online. Registration forms are posted on the school admissions page here from April until June. Two forms need to be completed for 11 Plus Entry: The Entrance Test Registration Form (online) and the Local Authority Form, also known as a Secondary School Preference Form. The latter document needs to be returned to the local authority directly by the deadline date specified on the form.

 

Adams Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam for Adams follows the same structure as other grammar schools in the Wolverhampton and Wrekin region. The exam consists of

 

 

The four papers are split over two tests, each lasting 45 minutes, with each paper divided into individually timed sections.

 

Adams Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Most pupils who attend Adams Grammar, join in Year 7, although the school does admit pupils for both day and boarding in Years 8 and 9, if there are spaces available.

 

Parents can apply to the school regardless of their address in the UK, as places are awarded based on merit. Day places are determined based on student performance in the entrance examination, with boarding places decided based on the individual needs of the candidate.  Applications are open to UK, or EU passport holders.

 

How to Prepare for the Adams Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

 

One of the most effective ways to prepare for the 11 Plus exam is to use practice exam papers. Not only do they help you identify your child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can also help improve their time management skills.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, all of our practice papers come complete with answers, so you can accurately measure your child’s performance. We have a selection of 11 Plus exam papers to choose from to help your child prepare for entry to Adams Grammar.

 

We recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Adams Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Photo of two boys studying in the classroom

This article explains everything you need to know about the 11+ Kent Test, including:

  • A complete breakdown of the actual exam timings and question types
  • Sample Kent 11+ questions for all subjects
  • Expert tips and suggestions on how to prepare your child to pass the test with flying colours!

 

What is the Kent Test?

 

The Kent Test is an examination used to assess whether Year 7 grammar school entry is a suitable option for your child. It is used by most, but not all, of the 35 wholly selective and 4 partially selective grammar schools in the region.

 

When is the Kent Test taken?

 

The Kent exam is taken by students at the beginning of Year 6. This year, the test will be held on 7th September 2017 for students who go to school in Kent. It will be taken on 9th September 2017 by students who go to school outside of Kent.

 

How many candidates take the Kent Test?

 

Unfortunately, there are far more applications than places available at Kent grammar schools. In 2015, 14,486 students took the test and 6,259 passed. In 2016, 15,253 students took the test and 6,537 passed. The demand for places and number of applicants increases yearly.

 

What is covered in the Kent Test?

 

The examination consists of three separate assessments:

 

Section 1: This exam is 1 hour long and tests Reasoning. It is broken into three shorter sections addressing Verbal Reasoning, Spatial Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning.

 

Section 2: This exam is 1 hour long and tests English and Mathematics.

 

Section 3: A writing task of 40 minutes, including 10 minutes of planning time. This is not marked and only used by Headteachers in borderline assessment cases.

 

Sections 1 and 2 of the Kent Test are multiple-choice examinations. Each question will have 5 answer choices and your child will need to mark their responses on a separate answer sheet. Your child will need to draw a line through the correct answer on a grid like this:

 

Kent 11 Plus Test Answer Grid

 

What is Verbal Reasoning and how is it tested in the Kent 11+ exam?

 

Verbal Reasoning questions can contain words, letters and numbers and assess the relationship amongst and between them.

 

The Kent 11 plus Verbal Reasoning assessment begins with a timed 10-minute practice section. This will be followed by a 20-minute Verbal Reasoning exam. There will be roughly 32 questions in this section, which means students will have around 40 seconds to answer each question. Speed is, therefore, of the essence!

 

The Verbal Reasoning exam will contain various different question types. For example, it may contain 4 different types of VR problems, each tested with 8 questions.

 

Here are a few example 11+ Verbal Reasoning questions:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Question 1

11 plus Verbal Reasoning Question 2 11 plus Kent Verbal Reasoning Question 3 Kent 11 plus Verbal Reasoning Questions 4

 

What is Non-Verbal Reasoning and how is it tested in the Kent 11+ exam?

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning questions assess the relationships between shapes, such as their similarities, differences and sequence.

 

The Kent 11 plus exam contains a series of short NVR tests, each lasting 4-5 minutes. There will most likely be 3 short NVR subtests in total. Each subtest will focus on a different question type and be preceded by an untimed practice section. There will be 8-10 questions in each section, so your child will have roughly 30 seconds to answer each question.

 

Becoming familiar with the question types beforehand is the key to success. We’ve included a few sample questions below:

 

Analogy

how to prepare for kent 11 plus NVR section

 

Codes

Kent NVR exam test question 11 plus

 

 

Sequences

11+ Kent Sample Test Question Non-Verbal Reasoning

 

Odd One Out

11+ Kent Sample Non-Verbal Reasoning Question

 

What is Spatial Reasoning and how is it tested in the Kent 11+ exam?

 

Spatial Reasoning assesses how well a student can manipulate shapes and space in their head.

 

The 11+ Kent Test contains a series of short Spatial Reasoning tests, each lasting 4-5 minutes. There will probably be 2 Spatial Reasoning subtests. Each of them will focus on a different type of skill and will have an untimed practice section preceding it. There will be between 8 and 10 questions in each subtest, giving the student about 30 seconds to answer each question.

 

Below you will find an example of each of the two main Spatial Reasoning question types that may be used in the Kent 11 plus test:

 

Figure Recognition

11+ Kent Spatial Reasoning Sample Question

 

Figure Analysis

Kent 111 plus Test Sample Spatial Reasoning Test

 

How is Mathematics tested in the 11 plus Kent test?

 

The Maths test in the Kent 11+ exam is 25 minutes long and is preceded by a 5-minute practice section. It will most likely contain 25 questions, so your child will have 1 minute to answer each question. The test will cover topics learnt up to the beginning of Year 6 but will also contain a series of more trickier problems.

 

Here are a few sample Maths questions that are at the Kent 11+ standard:

 

Kent 11 plus Maths Sample Question

 

11 plus Kent Maths Sample Question 2

 

 

Maths 11 plus Kent Sample

 

How is English tested in the 11 plus Kent test?

 

The English test begins with a 5-minute practice section followed by a 25-minute exam. The test will most likely contain 24 or 25 questions, so your child will roughly have 1 minute to answer each question.

 

The Kent 11+ English exam will contain a short reading comprehension. Your child will need to read a passage and answer a series of questions based on it. There will also be questions that test Cloze skills, where the student must choose which word best completes a sentence, as well as questions that test spelling, punctuation and grammar.

 

Here are a few sample 11+ Kent style English questions:

11 plus English Kent Exam sample Questions

What can I do to help my child pass the Eleven Plus Kent Test?

 

As with most things in life, practice makes perfect! The Kent exam is time pressured and the key to doing well is answering the questions quickly and accurately. The best way to increase speed and accuracy is to familiarise your child with the content of the test and the various question types they will have to deal with. This way, they will approach the exam with confidence as they will know what to expect and what is expected of them.

 

How can Exam Papers Plus help?

 

We produce highly accurate and effective exam practice papers and have an excellent track record in helping children succeed in their 11+ exams. Our range of tried and tested resources will help your child ace the Kent 11 plus exam!

Keep reading for our specialist recommendations.

 

Recommendations: Verbal Reasoning

We’ve created 2 Verbal Reasoning Packs that each contain 4 full-length practice papers. These include examples of all the various different question types that could come up in the Kent 11+ Test. The practice tests are timed (equating to 40 seconds per question) so your child can get used to dealing with these types of questions under time pressure, just like they will need to in the Kent examination. Answers included. Available for immediate download so you can start your preparation right away.

 

Click on these packs to learn more and buy:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1. Ideal Practice for GL Assessment VR exams, including the 11 plus Kent Test. GL Assessment style Grammar School 11+ exams       11 plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Practice Papers

 

Recommendations: Non-Verbal Reasoning

We’ve created a Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack that contains 3 full-length practice papers. This pack covers all of the question types that could come up in the Kent 11+ Test. The practice tests are timed (equating to 30 seconds per question) and broken down into small sections, exactly like in the Kent Test. Answers and answer sheets of the same style as in the Kent Test are included. Available for immediate download so you can start your preparation right away.

 

Click on the pack below to learn more and buy:

 

11+ practice NVR papers for GL Assessment and Independent School examinations

 

Recommendations: Mathematics

We have 2 Mathematics Pack that contain multiple-choice questions similar to those found in the Kent 11 plus exam. Each pack contains 4 full-length exam papers that use the same timing per question (1 minute) as the actual exam. Answers included. You can purchase, download and start using these papers today.

 

Click on these packs to learn more and buy:

 

11+ Grammar School Exam Mathematics Papers with Answers     11+ Maths Practice Papers for Grammar School, ideal for Kent 11+ Maths Practice

 

Recommendations: English

We offer 3 expertly crafted packs that each contain 4 full-length exam papers. Not only do our papers use the same timing per question (1 minute) as the actual Kent exam but they also cover all of the question types that appear in the real thing: Comprehension, Cloze, Punctuation, Spelling and Grammar. Answers included. Available for download immediately after purchase.

 

Click on these packs to learn more and buy:

 

11+ Grammar Schools English Practice Papers    Kent 11 plus examinations English sample practice papers    11+ GL-style English Exam Papers

 

 

Recommendations: 11+ Kent Practice Tests

There’s no doubt that taking full practice tests is one of the most effective ways of preparing for the Kent 11+ exam. Therefore, not only do we provide the subject specific preparation materials mentioned above, we have also produced three exclusive full-length Kent Mock exams that cover all areas of the test.

 

The key benefits of our 11+ Kent Practice Tests include:

 

  • Specifically produced for the Kent 11+ exam and exclusively available through Exam Papers Plus
  • All subject and topic areas covered: English, Maths and Verbal, Non-Verbal and Spatial Reasoning
  • Replicates the actual examination experience with timed sections designed to match the Kent Test timings
  • Timed and untimed practice sections before each main test designed according to the Kent Test specifications
  • Multiple-choice response sheets included so your child can get accustomed to filling in their answers quickly and accurately
  • Answers included
  • Available for download and printing immediately after purchase. Gain access and start preparing today!

11+ Kent Practice Test 1

11+ Kent Practice Test 2

11+ Kent Practice Test 3

 

 

If you have any questions or concerns, don’t hesitate to get in touch. We are always happy to help and advise!

 

If you want to receive updates on the Kent 11 plus test and alerts on new product releases, subscribe to our mailing list at the bottom of this page.

 

Thanks for reading!

 

The Exam Papers Plus Team

 

Image Source

 

Posted on in Grammar Schools

Photo of a UK grammar school

There are currently 164 state-funded fully selective schools, or grammar schools in the UK. Of those 164, there are ten schools that stood out last year as being the top for GCSE results. We’ve compiled a list of the top grammar schools in the UK based on The Telegraph’s research of the top schools for GCSE results in 2016.

 

1. The Henrietta Barnett School

Screenshot of the Henrietta Barnett school home page

 

A grammar school with academy status, the Henrietta Barnett School is ranked as the top grammar school in the UK. Established in 1911 by Dame Henrietta Barnett, the school is exclusively for girls and is located in the Hampstead Garden Suburb in London. It’s consistently ranked one of the best state schools in the country for academic performance and always ranks high in the school league tables.

 

2. The Tiffin Girls’ School

Screenshot of the the Tiffin Girls School home page

 

This all-girls grammar is located in Kingston upon Thames in South-West London. Originally a voluntary-aided school, The Tiffin Girls’ School was founded in 1880 and gained academy status in 2011. Situated in a picturesque location and surrounded by over 9 acres of land, this grammar school came second in the Telegraph’s list of top UK grammar schools.

 

3. Reading School

Screenshot of Reading School homepage

 

A boys grammar school, situated in Reading in Berkshire, the Reading School was founded in 1125 and is the 10th oldest school in England. The school was established as part of Reading Abbey and day pupils don’t pay any tuition fees to attend. Students who board at the school are only required to pay for food and accommodation. Reading School consistently appears in top grammar school lists and is known for its reputation for producing very good GCSE results.

 

4. King Edward VI Camp Hill School

Screenshot of the King Edward IV Camp Hill School website homepage

 

Founded in 1883, King Edward VI Camp Hill School is a highly selective grammar and a consistent high achiever in the UK school league tables. Ranked 4th in the Telegraph’s top grammar schools, the school specialises in Maths, Science and Applied Learning. The school and its pupils has received numerous awards and Ofsted classifies the school as being an outstanding provider.

 

5. Tonbridge Grammar School

Screenshot of Tonbridge Grammar School website home page

 

This state grammar school is situated in Tonbridge, in Kent. Founded in 1905, Tonbridge Grammar School was originally established as part of the Technical Institute in Tonbridge and had only 19 students. Today, the school has enrolled around 1050 pupils aged between 11 and 18. Ranked as the 5th best grammar school in the UK, Tonbridge has also been an International Baccalaureate World School since 2014.

 

6. Queen Elizabeth’s High School

Screenshot of Queen Elizabeth School website

 

Located in Gainsborough, Lincolnshire, Queen Elizabeth’s High School was established in 1589 by Sir Robert Somerscale. The school has around 1250 pupils in attendance and regularly makes the top 10 in the school league tables. The school is classified as outstanding by Ofsted and appears 6th in the Telegraph’s best grammar schools in the UK.

 

7. Kendrick Girls’ Grammar

Screenshot of Kendrick School website

 

Founded in 1877, Kendrick Girls’ Grammar School is a selective grammar in Reading, Berkshire. The school gained academy status In 2010 and pupils are admitted on the basis of the school’s admissions test. Because the school is state-funded, students don’t have to pay any fees. As a result, the school is over-subscribed and competition for entry is very high.

 

8. Chelmsford County High School for Girls

Screenshot of Chelmsford County High School

 

Founded in 1906, Chelmsford County High School for Girls is a selective grammar school for pupils aged between 11 and 18 located. Located in Chelmsford, Essex, entry to the school is based on an admissions test and is considered one of the most competitive grammar school places. The school consistently achieves good exam results and regularly scores top marks in GCSE and A Levels.

9. Wilson’s School

Screenshot of Wilsons School website

 

In 9th position, Wilson’s School is a boys’ academy in Wallington, Sutton. Admission to the school is based on an entrance exam and the school has approximately 1,100 pupils. Founded in 1615, Wilson’s is one of England’s oldest state schools. It became an academy in 2011 and its GCSE results are among the best in the UK. The school has also been given grade 1 status by Ofsted.

10. Colchester County High for Girls

Screenshot of Colchester County High School for Girls

 

Founded in 1909, Colchester County High School for Girls is a selective girls’ grammar school in Colchester, Essex. With consistently high results in the school league tables, the school is ranked 10th in the Telegraph’s list of the best grammar schools in the UK.  Admission to Colchester County is by an academic selection test in Years 7 and 12.

 

Related post:

A List of Grammar Schools in London

 

Header image:

goo.gl/xqOf6M

Posted on in Grammar Schools

Photo of a grammar school campus

Unfortunately, students don’t always get their first choice of grammar school. If, as a parent, you think there are grounds to appeal the decision, there are steps you can take to have your case heard. In this post, we look at how to appeal a grammar school place decision.

 

Before You Appeal a Grammar School Place

 

Before you make an official appeal, it’s good to have a back-up plan. Start by requesting for your child to be placed on the waiting lists of any other schools that they’d want to attend. Even if you didn’t choose the schools on your preference form, you can still make the request. Places often become available before September as offers are declined and students relocate.

 

Visit the school that your child has been offered if you haven’t already. Dismissing a school place on the grounds that it simply wasn’t your first choice isn’t a good idea. Arrange for you and your child to visit the school for a tour. After speaking with students and staff, you may discover that the school would be a good fit for your child after all.

 

Double check if your child would qualify for a bursary to their first-choice, or other suitable schools. Many grammar schools offer bursaries to pupils who demonstrate exceptional ability in certain subjects like Art, Drama, Music, or Sports. Some schools even offer bursaries for extra-curricular activities like chess.

 

What Are the Grounds for a Grammar School Appeal?

A photo of paperwork on a desk

 

There are two instances where you can appeal a grammar school place. The first is when the school hasn’t properly followed its own admissions procedures. And the second is when your child will be at harm by not attending the school.

 

In the first instance, you should check the grammar school’s admissions policy to make sure that it has been followed correctly. If not, you could make this the basis of your appeal. Alternatively, if you believe that your child will be at harm by not being offered a place, you’ll need to provide solid reasons. Some examples might include:

 

  • Difficult family circumstances
  • Religious reasons
  • Special needs or health issues that only your first-choice school can cater for
  • Exceptional ability in a subject that the school specialises in
  • Travel issues
  • Personal or emotional issues, such as bullying etc

 

It’s important to remember that you need to demonstrate exceptional circumstances for the appeal, as very few are actually awarded.

 

Making a Grammar School Appeal

 

Legally, you can appeal any grammar school decision, whether the school was your first, second, or third choice. The appeals process can vary slightly from school to school, so it’s important that you find out each school’s specific policy.

 

When you receive notification of your school place (whether awarded or not), the paperwork will outline the school’s appeals process. From there, you can follow the steps to lodge the appeal. You should note the deadline for submitting your paperwork and supporting evidence. In some cases, a letter of intent will be accepted as an initial notification.

 

You should also find out who will hear your appeal. In some counties, it’s the local authority that makes the decision, and in others, it’s the school itself.

 

As part of the process, you will be required to submit supporting evidence, demonstrating your reasons for the appeal. Again, each school is different, but appeals evidence can include:

 

  • Letters of recommendation from relevant professionals
  • Reports from health professionals
  • Reports from current school teachers
  • Travel timetables
  • Awards and recognitions

 

The more evidence you’re able to provide, the better.

 

How to Prepare for a Grammar School Appeal Hearing?

A hand holding a highligher pen

 

After submitting your appeals paperwork and supporting evidence, you will normally be invited to an appeal hearing in front of a panel. You will be given the names of everyone on the panel and required to inform the school if you know any of them.

 

Although it’s not compulsory for you to attend the hearing, being present will give you further opportunity to elaborate on your case. You should note, however, that you can’t bring any new evidence with you to the hearing.

 

Most grammar school hearings last around 30 minutes although there isn’t a set time in which it needs to be completed by. Each panel member should be impartial and they’ll need to follow all relevant codes of practice.

 

When Do I Find Out the Appeal Decision?

 

You’ll normally hear the outcome of your appeal a few days after your hearing – usually within the week. The appeals panel will also give you a date at your hearing. The panel’s decision is final and the admissions authority needs to follow through on the outcome unless it’s overturned in court.

 

If your appeal has been successful, you should receive an offer letter from the school shortly after. If the appeal has been unsuccessful, you should opt to stay on the waiting lists of the other schools your child applied to as places may become free before the new school year in September.

 

You can only make a grammar school appeal once every year, so it may be the case that your child will need to attend the school that they’ve been allocated for one year, before you can re-appeal the decision for entry to your first-choice.

 

Related posts:

What Are the Advantages of Attending a Grammar School?

 

Image sources:

goo.gl/E6oAUd

goo.gl/2p76EA

goo.gl/d9csYp

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Father and daughter in school

Choosing a grammar school for your child is a big decision – after all, they’ll be spending 5+ years there and there are 164 of them in total in England. Unfortunately, deciding on a grammar school isn’t as simple as making an application.

 

When we consider that your child’s 11 Plus exam results will be a determining factor in their options, the decision becomes ever-more important. In this post, we will guide you through the process of choosing a grammar school with your child.

 

Research Schools in Your Local Area

 

The first thing to do when exploring your child’s grammar school options, is to find out what schools are in your area. This includes state comprehensive schools as well, as it’s important that you know what the grammar school alternatives are.

 

Ask friends and neighbours who have older children where they went to school and ask their opinions on the level of education they received, including the quality of teaching etc. Knowing what schools other children in your area attend gives you a good grounding on which to base your own decision.

 

If you live in one of the larger grammar school areas, you’ll likely be able to choose from a few different schools. However, if you live outside  a grammar school area, your choice may be significantly limited, and boarding may be an option to consider.

 

It’s important that you factor in the logistics of your child attending a school in a different local authority as travel time, expenses etc. can quickly become ‘issues’ if not accounted for beforehand.

 

If you live in London, you might find our post Grammar Schools in London a useful resource.

 

Consider Whether Your Child Would Qualify for a Bursary

School pupil playing the violin

 

Many parents don’t consider the option of applying to fee-paying independent schools but there are those that offer bursary and scholarship programmes. Furthermore, if your child shows exceptional ability in a subject like art, drama, sport or music, then fee-paying schools could also be an avenue to explore. Some schools have scholarships for extra-curricular activities.

 

Read Reviews of Each School

 

Once you’ve drawn up a long-list of potential schools, the next stage is to create a short-list. One of the criteria on your short-list should be quality. The best way to determine how good a school might be, is to read reviews from current and former pupils, parents and teaching staff.

 

A good place to start is the school’s own website. How do they describe themselves? What activities and facilities do they offer? Have they won any awards in any particular areas? How the school sees itself is an important consideration.

 

For non-biased reviews of your grammar school short-list, look for independent websites like The Good Schools Guide and School Guide. Normally the schools reviewed on these sites have been visited in person by someone from the website and so the reviews are usually a first-hand account.

 

You should also read the OFSTED reports for each school for a deeper insight into the school’s performance. It’s easy to make assumptions about a school on the surface, but once you look at their statistics, you’ll get a far clearer overview of what the school is like.

 

Secondary school league tables are also an important consideration, especially if your child has the choice of several schools. A school’s position in the league tables is often a reflection of the quality of teaching at the school. Likewise, if your child has special needs, check the school’s SEN policies.

 

Another good source of information on grammar schools is 11 Plus forums where parents just like you are asking the same questions. For a list of useful forums, check out our post Our List of the Best 11 Plus Forums.

 

Check the Admissions Policies of Each School

Paperwork filed in shelves

 

Most schools admit pupils on the basis of their 11 Plus exam results. However, there are often other conditions attached to entry, such as the outcome of a face-to-face interview and the results of a school report from the pupil’s current school.

 

It’s important that you’re aware of each school’s admission policy to determine whether your child has a chance of being accepted. We’d also advise that you contact the school’s admissions secretary for more information on their entry process.

 

Arrange a Visit to Your Short-Listed Schools

 

It’s one thing to read reviews from other people online, but quite another to visit the school in person. Most schools offer guided tours to parents and pupils who are interested in applying for a place. These visits give you the opportunity to see the school grounds, meet current pupils, teaching staff and very often, the headteacher. Grammar schools also host regular open days, where all parents and prospective students are invited to visit and meet teaching staff.

 

Visiting a grammar school in person gives you an insight into what a typical school day is like and helps you get a feel for the place.

 

Discuss the Options with Your Child

Headshot of a school girl

 

At first, you child may not have any strong feelings about one school over the other, but the more you discuss their options, the more you’ll be able to judge what school might be the best fit for them. Some things that you may want to consider with your child include:

 

  • The facilities and activities on offer
  • The location of the school grounds
  • Your child’s first impressions of the school
  • The distance to the school from home
  • How your child found the teaching staff and pupils
  • Your child’s academic strengths and weaknesses
  • You child’s sociability

 

When discussing the options with your child, try to determine the reasons why they prefer one school over another. Try as much as possible, to keep your opinions to yourself initially, so as not to influence them one way or another. Sometimes, disagreeing with your child too early can make them all the more determined to stick to their decision. Once your child has had a few days to mull over their options, ask them again what their thoughts are and then ask them if you can share your opinions.

 

Rank Your Preferred Schools in Order

 

Once you’ve discussed all the options, the final stage is to rank your child’s preferred schools in order. Whether you have a list of 8 schools, or a list of 2, it’s important that you have a backup in case your child doesn’t get their first choice. Try to set your child’s expectations in getting a place at their preferred school and try not to put too much pressure on them to perform well in the 11 Plus exams.

 

Related post:

Top Grammar Schools in the UK

 

Image sources:

goo.gl/qhKf5o

goo.gl/UxcEvk

goo.gl/KceEAw

goo.gl/mJ22R5

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Two school children using a laptop

There are many benefits to passing the 11 Plus exam, least of all having the opportunity to apply to your child’s first choice grammar school. However, there’s more to passing the exam than simply knowing the material. And sometimes it’s the extra effort that makes the real difference. In this post, we provide our overview of how to pass the 11 Plus exam.

 

Find Out What Exam Board Will Administer the Test

 

There are two 11 Plus exam boards that administer the test – the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM) and Granada Learning (GL). Where you live will determine which test your child will sit. Although the exam format for each test is similar, there are differences that will affect what material your child will need to study.

Start Preparing for the 11 Plus Early

School pupil working in class

 

In most cases, children need at least some preparation if they’re to pass the 11 Plus exam and in most cases, they need a regular study schedule months in advance. Having a study plan in place well before the day of the exam will give your child plenty of time to practise and identify their strengths and weaknesses.

 

However, it’s important not to overload your child with too much study. It’s always best to space out learning into small chunks, over a long period of time, so that your child doesn’t become overwhelmed. At 10 or 11 years old, a child can concentrate for around half an hour before becoming weary. If you have a structured study plan in place, half an hour every other night should be all your child needs to do well in the exam.

 

Cover Each Element of the Exam

 

Regardless of which exam board administers your child’s test, they will still be tested on the same subjects, namely English, Maths, Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning. It’s important that your child’s study schedule covers all possible topics.

 

For the English part of the exam, your child will be tested on all, or a combination of the following topics:

 

  • Spelling
  • Punctuation
  • Comprehension
  • Sentence structure
  • Grammar
  • Vocabulary
  • Literacy

 

You should therefore aim to work on these topics with your child through writing exercises and reading.

 

In the non-verbal reasoning section, your child will be tested on shapes and spatial awareness. Studying mirror images, working on addition and subtraction using objects and Maths games are all good ways to help your child prepare for non-verbal reasoning questions.

 

For an insight into the types of questions that are asked in the non-verbal reasoning section, take a look at this video from CareerVids:

 

 

For the verbal reasoning part of the exam, there are many different types of question that your child could be asked. Generally speaking, focusing on building vocabulary and using practice papers can help your child improve their verbal reasoning skills. CareerVids also has a useful video on verbal reasoning questions:

 

 

For the Maths section of the exam, your child should have a good basic understanding of numeracy and Maths concepts as well as any material covered in the Key Stage 2 Maths curriculum.

 

Practise Both Question Formats

 

In the 11 Plus exam, there are two question formats – multiple choice and standard. Multiple choice involves selecting the correct answer from several options and the standard format requires a written response.

 

Make sure your child practises both question formats if they are both tested by the schools you are applying to.  Parents often believe that the best way to prepare for the exam is to focus only on the standard format questions with the assumption that the multiple choice is easy. However, both formats require a different set of skills and so should be practised equally.

 

Use 11 Plus Practice Papers

11 Plus English and Maths practice papers

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that using practice exam papers is one of the most effective methods to pass the 11 Plus. Of course, no one approach is the best way to prepare, but practice papers are good at putting theory into practice.

 

Not only do they help your child familiarise themselves with the layout of the exam, but they encourage good time management too. About half way through your study schedule, you should introduce 11 Plus practice papers into your child’s routine so they have time to get used to answering questions under timed conditions.

 

Practice papers also give a good overview of where your child’s strengths and weaknesses lie. If there are areas that your child needs to improve in, you can adjust their study schedule to focus on their weaker areas in the lead up to the exam.

 

Get Support From Other Parents

 

Sometimes, the best advice comes from those who have already experienced preparing their child for the 11 Plus. Although other parents aren’t always the most forthcoming in sharing information about the exam face-to-face, there’s lots of good information out there on 11 Plus forums. Online communities are particularly good for local information on the 11 Plus, like what exam board administers the test, what the pass mark is, how many school places are available etc.

 

To save you time trawling the internet for these communities, we’ve put together a list of the best 11 Plus forums on the internet.

 

Consider Using a Private Tutor

11 Plus tutor helping a child with classwork

 

If you find that your child is struggling with their 11 Plus preparation, you might want to try a private tutor. One of the main benefits of tutoring is that your child will have the undivided attention of someone who really knows what they’re talking about for at least an hour.

 

However, eleven plus tutors can be hard to come by, so you should start your search for one early as many are booked up months in advance.  If you live in London, then you’re in luck because, at Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in preparing pupils for the 11 Plus exam. We provide tuition by the hour as well as offering intensive and residential courses.

 

Although following this advice on how to pass the 11 Plus isn’t a guarantee of success, it will help you prepare your child as fully as possible.

 

Related post:

11 Plus Revision Guide

 

Image sources:

goo.gl/7ndJPi

goo.gl/5AhsdQ

goo.gl/wE0B5M

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Two school kids working on a computer

Ever since the introduction of modern grammar schools in 1944, they have been associated with academic success. Their selective process by means of the 11 Plus exam makes grammar entry very competitive.

 

There are currently 164 grammar schools in England and 69 in Northern Ireland and when compared to the number of state secondaries (around 3,000) it’s easy to see why they’re so sought after by parents.

 

In this post, we take a closer look at the benefits of attending a grammar school.

 

What Are Grammar Schools?

 

Grammars are state secondary schools that admit pupils based on their academic performance in the 11 Plus exam. Under the grammar school system, students who are successful in passing the exam gain entry to their local grammar and those who are unsuccessful attend their local secondary modern.

 

The alternative to the grammar school system and the most commonly used in the UK is the comprehensive system, where students of all abilities learn together.

 

Although there are some grammars in Wales and Scotland, they are only identified as such by name. They do not operate under the grammar school system, and are non-selective.

 

Opportunities for the Most Capable Students

A group of school girls chatting

Grammar schools undermine privilege

 

It’s often said that grammar schools undermine privilege and enable the brightest students to study at top schools, regardless of their social background. Because entry to grammar school is based on academic performance in the 11 Plus, pupils who score highly won’t be denied a place for any external reasons.

 

A commonly held belief about grammars is that they provide opportunities for students from poorer backgrounds to climb the social ladder.

 

Consistently Strong Exam Results

 

Because grammar pupils are generally of the same ability, it’s argued that teachers are able to progress lessons more effectively than at comprehensive level. As such, grammar schools tend to be the highest performing schools in local and national league tables.

 

According to a 2008 report conducted by the Sutton Trust and published on the Grammar Schools Association website, grammar school students perform better in GCSEs than pupils from other schools. There are also indications that grammar pupils make greater progress at KS3 and KS4 level.

 

Successful Students

School girl chatting with friends

Many high acheivers attended grammar schools

 

Another advantage of grammar schools is their track record of producing students who go on to have successful careers in a variety of industries. Former grammar school pupils who are now high achievers include John Lennon, Mick Jagger, Boris Johnson, Margaret Thatcher, David Attenborough and Anthony Hopkins.

 

It’s often said that attending a grammar school provides pupils with the skills, resources and connections required to be successful later in life.

 

Improved Social Mobility

 

Gaining entry to a top grammar school means having access to a comprehensive education and a network of influential friends. Evidence suggests that the friendships students forge at school have an impact on their future success.

 

Likewise, a recent study conducted by a group of universities, including the University of Bath, Bristol, and the Institute of Education at the University of London concluded that pupils who attend a grammar school end up earning more than those who attend comprehensive schools.

 

Image sources:

https://www.flickr.com/photos/communitiesuk/5167179548/

https://www.flickr.com/photos/hartlepoolfe/27837723295

https://www.flickr.com/photos/hartlepoolfe/27225717933/

Posted on in 13+, Grammar Schools

Boy in the classroom turning over an exam paper

Is your child set to sit the 12 Plus/13 Plus late transfer test in the hope of gaining a place at grammar school? If so, we’ve written this post especially for you.

 

Missing out on a school place at 11 Plus level can be quite discouraging for a child. However, if you’re lucky enough to live in an area where the 12+/13+ exam is used, your child could have a second chance of gaining entry through the late transfer test.

 

What is the 12 Plus/13 Plus Exam (Late transfer test)?

 

The 12+/13+ exam is for pupils in Years 7 and 8 who may have narrowly missed out on a grammar school place due to their 11+ exam results. The 12 Plus/13 Plus allows a child more time to prepare (up to 18 months) for the late transfer test. The tests have a strong academic focus on the core subjects and is used by many of the top grammar schools in the UK.

 

The exam aims to determine a child’s suitability to join a grammar school in Years 8 or 9. Not all schools accept 12+/13+ entry, but those that do, normally do so on the basis of available spaces in those year groups. Spaces can become available if there are too few applicants for the number of vacancies that year, or if children consequently leave those year groups during term time.

 

Grammar schools tend to have a larger intake of students at 11 Plus level than at 12+/13+. In some instances, there may be as little as 2 or 3 available places at 12 Plus / 13 Plus, so it’s important to set your child’s expectations as part of their preparation.

 

What Does the 12+/13+ Exam Involve?

Boy in red T shirt studying in the classroom

The exam tests ability in the core subjects: English, Maths and Reasoning

 

Every school has a slightly different exam structure, but generally, children are tested on their abilities in the core subjects of Maths, English and Reasoning.

 

Studying for the 12 Plus/13 Plus Exam

 

We’ve already written an in-depth guide to helping your child revise for exams, but to provide a summary, we’d recommend:

 

  • Starting revision early so that any gaps in your child’s knowledge can be identified and improved.
  • Agreeing a study timetable with your child so that they feel involved in the process of studying.
  • Studying little but often. The average 12-year-old has an attention span of around 30 minutes, so be sure not to overdo it.
  • Use a variety of different studying methods based on the three main learning styles (auditory, visual and kinaesthetic). For example, you could try a combination of flashcards, listening exercises and presentations to provide variety.

 

 

Image sources:

https://www.flickr.com/photos/wwworks/8081867203

https://www.flickr.com/photos/chrisyarzab/5659535221

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Private school building with a cherry blossom tree in the foreground

There are currently 19 grammar schools in London and 164 in England in total. Grammar schools are state-funded secondary schools that admit pupils based on their performance in the 11 Plus exam.

 

The following list aims to provide parents with a brief overview of each grammar school in London:

 

Barnet

 

Henrietta Barnett School (girls)

 

Situated in the Hampstead Garden Suburb, the Henrietta Barnett School (HBS) is a non-denominational school for female students aged between 11 and 18. Founded in 1911, the school became an Academy in 2012.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School for Boys

 

Founded in 1573, Queen Elizabeth’s School is set within a 30-acre campus. After becoming a comprehensive school in 1971, the School reverted back to a boys’ grammar in 1994. Research by the Sutton Trust suggests that the school sends more students to Oxford and Cambridge than any other state school in England.

 

St. Michael’s Catholic School (girls)

 

Situated in North Finchley, St. Michael’s School is a Voluntary Aided three-form entry secondary for girls. Founded in 1908 the school is under the control of the Congregation of the Sisters of the Poor Child Jesus. Since September 2009, boys are admitted to 6th Form.

 

Bexley

 

Beths Grammar School (boys)

 

Beths Grammar School has an intake of boys aged between 11 and16. This selective school also has a mixed Sixth Form. In 1995, the school received Technology College Status and in 2005 was recognised as one of the first High Performing Specialist Schools.

 

Bexley Grammar School (mixed)

Screenshot of Bexley Grammar school in London

A co-educational school in Welling, London

 

Bexley Grammar School was founded in 1955 and opened by Sir Edward Heath. It’s a co-educational school based in Welling and has Academy status. In some cases, students can gain entry to Year 7 at age 10 and to Sixth Form at 16 if they meet all relevant criteria.

 

Chislehurst and Sidcup School (mixed)

 

Chislehurst and Sidcup School opened its doors in 1931. Known locally as ‘Chis and Sid’, the mixed-sex school is situated in Sidcup and has academy status.

 

Townley Grammar School (girls)

 

Townley Grammar School in Bexleyheath is an academy status school for girls. Previously known as Bexley Technical High School for Girls, the grammar takes students from Years 7-11 with a mixed male sixth form.

 

Bromley

 

Newstead Wood School (girls)

Screenshot of Newstead Wood School's website

A highly-selective school in London

 

Newstead Wood School is a highly selective girls’ school in Orpington. Founded in 1957 by the Kent Education Committee, it became part of Bromley in 1965. The school has a track record for providing good value and helping students achieve high scores at A-level.

 

St Olave’s & St Saviour’s Grammar School (boys)

 

This highly selective boys’ secondary school is located in Orpington. Known locally as STOGS, the school is one of the top performing state schools in the UK. In 2011, St Olave’s was ranked by The Financial Times as the fourth best performing state school at A-level.

 

Enfield

The Latymer School (mixed)

 

This selective, mixed school in Edmonton was founded in 1624. School places are awarded based on performance in the 11 Plus exam with 20 places reserved each year for students with exceptional musical talent.

 

Kingston upon Thames

 

Tiffin Girls’ School

Screenshot of Tiffin Girls School

A very popular academy in London

 

Tiffin Girls’ School in Kingston upon Thames moved from voluntary aided status to an Academy school in 2011. With around 1000 pupils aged between 11 and 18 and a further 300 in the sixth form, this academy is very popular in London.

 

Tiffin School (boys)

 

Tiffin School in Kingston was established in 1880 and has a reputation for providing a top class education. The school has an intake of 180 students per year and converted to Academy status in 2011.

 

Redbridge

 

Ilford County High School (boys)

 

Ilford County High School was is one of the original selective state schools in the borough of Redbridge. This specialist school for boys has a solid performance record. The Sixth Form currently offers eighteen subjects at AS or A Level and the school expects pupil places to rise over the next few years.

 

Woodford County High School (girls)

 

Woodford County High School (WCHS) in Woodford Green is a secondary all-girls selective school. Founded in 1919, the school offers the 120 top performing pupils from the 11 plus exam a place where, they are then allocated form classes.

 

Sutton

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls

 

Located in Cheam in the borough of Epsom and Ewell, Nonsuch High School for Girls was established in 1938. The school has academy status and is surrounded by 22 acres of campus on the edge of Nonsuch Park. With a specialist science college and languages school Nonsuch has received various awards.

 

Sutton School for Boys

 

Sutton School for Boys opened in 1899. The school is Victorian in its origins and has an intake of pupils aged between 11 and 18.

 

Wallington County Grammar School (boys)

 

The original Wallington County School (WCGS) was founded in 1927 with 71 pupils. The current site has been situated on Croydon Road in Sutton since in 1935.

 

Wallington High School for Girls

 

Wallington High School for Girls is a selective school in Sutton and was established in 1888 by a group of nuns. The school accommodates approximately 2310 students and has a Sixth Form College.

 

Wilson’s School (for boys)

Screenshot of Wilson's School website

One of the oldest state schools in England

 

Located in Wallington, Wilson’s School is a boys’ academy with approximately 1,100 pupils. Founded in 1615, Wilson’s is one of the oldest state schools in England. Entry to the school is based on performance in the entrance examination. The school celebrated is 400th anniversary in 2015 with a visit from Prince Edward.

 

Related post:

The Best Grammar Schools in the UK

How to Choose a Grammar School With Your Child

How to Appeal a Grammar School Decision

 

Header image source:

https://www.flickr.com/photos/50826080@N00/13696857813

Posted on in Grammar Schools

Two school girls with blue uniforms

Passing the 11 Plus exam gives your child the opportunity to apply for grammar school entrance. However, even with an eleven plus pass, admission isn’t a guarantee. Over-subscription often means that students are subject to the school’s admissions criteria.

 

Every Local Authority has different admissions criteria and individual schools often have their own selection process too. Because there’s such a variation in grammar school admissions, we’ve put together this post to provide you with a general overview of the grammar school entrance system.

 

How Are Grammar School Places Allocated?

Girl with a pen in her hand and books

Every Local Authority has its own admissions criteria

 

Grammar school entrance is governed by the School Admissions Code, who set out criteria that every local authority needs to follow. Within this criteria, individual schools are able to set their own admissions policies to satisfy their own requirements. Children who are in care or have special needs are given priority places.

 

Some of the criteria that grammar schools choose to base their admissions policy on can include:

 

Catchment Area

 

Some schools use catchment areas as a means of admission when places are over-subscribed. So-called ‘priority areas’ mean that pupils from certain postcodes are given priority places over others out with the catchment area.

 

Distance from School

 

One of the most common admissions criteria is the distance pupils live from the school. Those who live closer are given priority. Exact distances are measures using ordnance survey maps to provide a fair assessment.

 

Sibling Priority

 

Students who already have a brother or sister at the school are sometimes given priority places. However, each school enforces this differently, for example, they may state that the brother or sister needs to be in a specific year group at the time of applying.

 

Special Relationship Priority

 

In some cases, grammar school places are given to pupils whose parents or close relatives are teachers at the school.

 

Scores in the 11 Plus Exam

 

When places are over-subscribed, some schools, known as ‘super-selective’ grammars look at the 11 Plus test scores. Those with the highest scores are admitted first until all places are filled

 

Feeder Schools

 

Grammar schools sometimes give priority to pupils from partnered feeder schools. This criterion is often used as a way of discouraging parents that would consider moving house in order to be in a certain catchment area.

 

Religion

 

Faith schools are able to prioritise pupils based on their religion and involvement in a certain faith. Application forms, followed by interviews are sometimes used as a means of testing a family’s devotion to the faith.

 

Aptitude

 

Partially selective schools allocate places to pupils with particular talents. For example, a child may be admitted to a grammar school on the basis that they have a particular aptitude for sport, art, or languages.

 

Banding

 

Schools that strive to admit pupils of all abilities often do so through the two types of banding criteria. The first is common banding, where all pupils across the local authority are given an entry test and the second is where schools can use their own tests. The schools admissions code ensures that all banding is fair and not disproportionate to high-achieving students.

 

Lottery System

 

The lottery system is a process of random selection, whereby pupils that satisfy the allocations criteria are chosen by an unbiased computerised programme.

 

Exceptional Circumstances

 

In cases where students are at risk of being excluded from allocation on the basis of medical, educational, or social grounds, exceptional circumstance criteria can be used alongside professional supporting evidence.

 

A Combination of Criteria

 

In some cases, a combination of criteria from the above is used to for selection, which can become quite confusing for parents who want to understand the admissions process fully.

 

Grammar School Entry Advice

Two girls in school uniform using computers

Preparing your child with practice papers will help familiarise them with the exam

 

Now that you have a general overview of how the admissions process works, here are our tips for preparing your child for grammar school entry:

 

Try to set your child’s expectations about the success of gaining a place at their first-choice school. It’s important that they are prepared for the eventuality that may not be allocated a place.

 

If the school has an interview process, it can be beneficial to prepare your child by discussing topical news issues that show an awareness of the world around them. During interviews, schools look for evidence of good communication and social interaction and having an awareness of current affairs can demonstrate both these skills.

 

In preparation for the 11 Plus exam, ensure that your child revises every relevant subject from Maths, English, Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Awareness. Divide attention between each subject according to their strengths and weaknesses.

 

Practice with 11 + mock exam papers in the lead up to the exam and allocate the correct amount of time for each paper. This way, your child will become familiar with how long they have to spend on each question and they types of questions being asked.

 

Image sources:

https://www.flickr.com/photos/ioelondon/6143379343/

https://www.flickr.com/photos/uk_parliament/5199009512/

https://www.flickr.com/photos/worldbank/4725033296

Posted on in 11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Tiffin Girls School

IMPORTANT NOTE: The examination process at the Tiffin Schools has changed since this post was written.

Please click here for most up to date information relating to the 2017 exams for entry in 2018.

 

Tiffin School (for boys) and The Tiffin Girls’ School are two of the most competitive grammar schools in the country; they each receive well over a thousand applications! This post summarises the examination process, including key dates and the subjects tested. Read more